FCC ID: AZ489FT7065 2-Way Portable Radio with Bluetooth, Bluetooth LE and WiFi

 

PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO XPR 755 0/XPR 7580/

XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e COLOR DISPLAY PORTABLE USER GUIDE Contents Declaration of Conformity.......................15 Important Safety Information........17 Software Version............................18 Computer Software Copyrights....19 Handling Precautions....................20 Getting Started...............................21 How to Use This Guide..................................21 What Your Dealer/System Administrator Can Tell You.............................................21 Preparing Your Radio for Use.......23 Charging the Battery......................................23 Attaching the Battery..................................... 23 Attaching the Antenna................................... 24 Attaching the Belt Clip................................... 25 Attaching the Universal Connector Cover

(Dust Cover)............................................. 25 Powering Up the Radio..................................27 Adjusting the Volume.....................................27 Identifying Radio Controls............29 Radio Controls...............................................29 Using the 4Way Navigation Button..............30 Using the Keypad.......................................... 31 Non-Connect Plus Operations......33 Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode.................................... 34 C o n t e n t s 1 English Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button.................34 Programmable Buttons....................... 34 Assignable Radio Functions.....35 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions............................ 38 Accessing the Programmed Functions....................................... 38 Identifying Status Indicators................39 Display Icons............................39 Call Icons................................. 42 Advanced Menu Icons..............42 Mini Notice Icons......................43 Sent Item Icons

....................43 Bluetooth Device Icons............ 44 Job Tickets Icons..................... 44 LED Indicator........................... 44 Alert Tones...............................46 Indicator Tones........................ 46 Switching Between Conventional Analog and Digital Mode................46

...............................47

..................................48

...................... 48 IP Site Connect Capacity Plus Linked Capacity Plus s t n e t n o C 2 English Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode.................................... 50 Selecting a Zone.................................50 Selecting a Channel............................51 Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call...................................... 51 Receiving and Responding to a Group Call....................52 Receiving and Responding to a Private Call

.............. 53 Receiving an All Call ............... 53 Receiving and Responding to a Selective Call

...........54 Receiving and Responding to a Phone Call

............... 54 Making a Radio Call............................56 Making a Group Call................ 57

...........58 Making a Private Call Making an All Call ................... 59 Making a Selective Call

....... 59 Making a Phone Call with the One Touch Access Button..................................60 Making a Private Call with a One Touch Call Button........62 Making a Group, Private or All Call with the Programmable Number Key

..................................63 Making a Phone Call with the Programmable Phone Button Making a Call with the

.................. 64 Programmable Manual

...................... 66 Dial Button Stopping a Radio Call

.....................68 Talkaround..........................................69 Monitoring Features............................69 Monitoring a Channel...............70 Permanent Monitor...................70 Advanced Features in Non-

Connect Plus Mode............ 71 Radio Check....................................... 71 Sending a Radio Check........... 71 C o n t e n t s Remote Monitor.................................. 72 Initiating Remote Monitor......... 73 Stopping Remote Monitor........ 74 Scan Lists........................................... 75 Viewing an Entry in the Scan List............................. 75 Viewing an Entry in the Scan List by Alias Search... 75 Editing the Scan List................ 76 Scan....................................................80 Starting and Stopping Scan..... 80 Responding to a Transmission During a Scan....................................81 Deleting a Nuisance Channel...81 Restoring a Nuisance Channel...............................82 Vote Scan

.......................................82 Contact Settings..................................82 Making a Group Call from Contacts..............................83 Making a Private Call from Contacts

..........................84 Making a Phone Call from Contacts..............................85 3 English Making a Call Alias Search

.........................................88 Making a Group, Private, Phone or All Call by Alias Search ................................89 Assigning an Entry to a Programmable Number Key

..................................90 Removing the Association between Entry and Programmable Number Key

..................................91 Adding a New Contact............. 92

.....93 Setting a Default Contact Call Indicator Settings.........................93 Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Call Alert

.........................................93 Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Private Calls

................................94 Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Selective Call

..................................94 Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Text Message............................. 95 Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Telemetry Status with Text..................................... 96 Assigning Ring Styles.............. 97 Selecting a Ring Alert Type......97 Configuring Vibrate Style......... 98 Escalating Alarm Tone Volume................................99 Call Log Features................................99 Viewing Recent Calls............... 99 Storing an Alias from a Call List.................................... 100 Deleting a Call from a Call List.................................... 100 Viewing Details from a Call List.................................... 101 Call Alert Operation...........................101 Receiving and Responding to a Call Alert.................... 101 Making a Call Alert from the Contact List....................... 102 s t n e t n o C 4 English Making a Call Alert with the One Touch Access Button................................102 Emergency Operation.......................103 Receiving an Emergency Alarm.................................104 Responding to an Emergency Alarm............. 104 Exiting Emergency Mode After Receiving the Emergency Alarm............. 105 Sending an Emergency Alarm.................................105 Sending an Emergency Alarm with Call.................. 106 Sending an Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow Reinitiating an Emergency

........................... 107 Mode................................. 108 Exiting Emergency Mode After Sending the Emergency Alarm............. 108 Man Down.........................................109 Turning the Man Down Feature On or Off..............109 Analog Message Encode

..............110 Sending MDC Message Encode to Dispatcher........110 Text Message Features ................... 111 Writing and Sending a Text Message........................... 111 Sending a Quick Text Message with the One Touch Access Button........ 112 Accessing the Drafts Folder...113 Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages..........................115 Managing Sent Text Messages..........................117 Receiving a Text Message.....120 Managing Received Text Messages..........................121 Job Tickets........................................125 Accessing the Job Ticket Folder................................126 Logging In and Out of the Remote Server..................126 Creating and Sending a Job Ticket................................ 127 Responding to the Job Ticket.128 Deleting a Job Ticket..............128 C o n t e n t s 5 English Privacy

..........................................129 Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF). 131 Multi-Site Controls

........................ 131 Starting an Automatic Site Search...............................131 Stopping an Automatic Site Search...............................132 Starting a Manual Site Search...............................133 Security.............................................134 Radio Disable.........................134 Radio Enable..........................135 Lone Worker..................................... 137 Password Lock Features.................. 138 Accessing the Radio from Password.......................... 138 Unlocking the Radio from Locked State..................... 139 Turning the Password Lock On or Off........................... 139 Changing the Password.........140 Bluetooth Operation..........................141 Turning Bluetooth On and Off..................................... 141 Finding and Connecting to a Bluetooth Device...............142 Finding and Connecting from a Bluetooth Device

(Discoverable Mode).........143 Disconnecting from a Bluetooth Device...............143 Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speaker and Bluetooth Device............................... 144 Viewing Device Details...........144 Editing Device Name..............144 Deleting Device Name........... 145 Bluetooth Mic Gain.................145 Permanent Bluetooth Discoverable Mode........... 146 Notification List..................................146 Accessing the Notification List.................................... 146 Auto-Range Transponder System

(ARTS)

.....................................147 Over-the-Air-Programming (OTAP).. 147 Wi-Fi Operation.................................148 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off..........148 Connecting to a Network Access Point..................... 148 Refreshing the Network List...149 s t n e t n o C 6 English Adding a Network...................150 Viewing Details of Network Access Points................... 150 Removing Network Access Points................................ 151 Utilities.............................................. 152 Locking and Unlocking the Keypad..............................152 Turning Keypad Tones On or Off................................. 152 Setting the Squelch Level...... 153 Setting the Power Level......... 154 Turning the Option Board Feature(s) On or Off..........154 Identifying Cable Type........... 154 Turning the Voice Operating Transmission (VOX) Feature On or Off..............155 Setting the Display Backlight Timer.................................156 Turning the Backlight Auto On or Off........................... 157 Turning the Radio Tones/

Alerts On or Off................. 157 Setting the Tone Alert Volume Offset Level..........158 C o n t e n t s Turning the Talk Permit Tone On or Off.................. 158 Turning the Power Up Alert Tone On or Off.................. 159 Setting the Text Message Alert Tone......................... 160 Changing the Display Mode...160 Adjusting the Display Brightness......................... 161 Language............................... 162 Turning the LED Indicator On or Off........................... 162 Turning the Introduction Screen On or Off...............163 Turning the Voice Announcement On or Off.. 163 Setting the Text-to-Speech Feature..............................164 Call Forwarding

..................166 Menu Timer............................166 Analog Mic AGC (Mic AGC-

A)...................................... 167 Digital Mic AGC (Mic AGC-

D)...................................... 167 Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio 7 English Speaker and Wired Accessory......................... 168 Intelligent Audio......................168 Turning the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Feature On or Off Turning the Microphone

..........169 Dynamic Distortion Control Feature On or Off. 170 Setting the Audio Ambience...171 Setting the Audio Profiles.......172 Turning GPS/GNSS On or Off..................................... 172 Text Entry Configuration........ 173 Flexible Receive List.............. 179 Accessing General Radio Information........................ 182 Front Panel Configuration

(FPC)................................ 185 Checking the RSSI Values.....186 Connect Plus Operations............187 s t n e t n o C 8 English Additional Radio Controls in Connect Plus Mode...... 188 Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button...............188 Programmable Buttons..................... 188 Assignable Radio Functions...189 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions.......................... 190 Identifying Status Indicators in Connect Plus Mode..................... 191 Display Icons..........................191 Call Icons............................... 193 Advanced Menu Icons............193 Sent Item Icons ..................... 194 Bluetooth Device Icons.......... 194 LED Indicator......................... 195 Indicator Tones...................... 196 Alert Tones.............................196 Switching Between Connect Plus and Non-Connect Plus Modes.....196 Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode...... 197 Selecting a Site.................................197 Roam Request....................... 197 Site Lock On/Off.....................197 Site Restriction.......................197 Selecting a Zone...............................198 Using Multiple Networks................... 199 Selecting a Call Type........................199 Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call.................................... 199 Receiving and Responding to a Group Call..................200 Receiving and Responding to a Private Call.................200 Receiving a Site All Call.........201 Receiving an Inbound Private Phone Call............ 201 Receiving an Inbound Phone Talkgroup Call....... 202 Inbound Phone Multi-Group Call....................................203 Making a Radio Call..........................203 Making a Call with the Channel Selector Knob..... 203 Making a Private Call with a One Touch Call Button......206 Making a Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button........................ 206 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button........................ 207 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call via the Phone Menu................................. 208 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call from Contacts. 208 Waiting for the Channel Grant in an Outbound Private Phone Call............ 209 Making a Buffered Over-Dial in a Connected Outbound Private Phone Call....................................210 Making a Live Over-Dial in a Connected Outbound Private Phone Call............ 210 Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode.......... 212 Auto Fallback.................................... 212 Indications of Auto Fallback Mode................................. 212 English C o n t e n t s 9 Making/Receiving Calls in Fallback Mode...................212 Returning to Normal Operation.......................... 213 Radio Check..................................... 213 Sending a Radio Check......... 214 Remote Monitor................................ 214 Initiating Remote Monitor....... 215 Scan..................................................216 Starting and Stopping Scan... 216 Responding to a Transmission During a Scan..................................216 User Configurable Scan....................217 Turning Scan On or Off.....................217 Editing the Scan List......................... 218 Add or Delete a Group via the Add Members Menu............................219 Understanding Scan Operation.........221 Scan Talkback.................................. 222 Contacts Settings..............................222 Making a Private Call from Contacts............................223 Making a Call Alias Search.... 224 Adding a New Contact........... 224 Call Indicator Settings.......................225 s t n e t n o C 10 English Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Call Alert .225 Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Private Calls.................................. 226 Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Text Message........................... 226 Selecting a Ring Alert Type....227 Configuring Vibrate Style....... 228 Escalating Alarm Tone Volume..............................229 Call Log Features..............................229 Viewing Recent Calls............. 229 Deleting a Call from a Call List.................................... 229 Viewing Details from a Call List.................................... 230 Call Alert Operation...........................230 Receiving and Responding to a Call Alert.................... 230 Making a Call Alert from the Contact List....................... 231 Making a Call Alert with the One Touch Access Button................................232 Emergency Operation.......................232 Receiving an Incoming Emergency........................234 Saving the Emergency Details to the Alarm List.... 234 Deleting the Emergency Details............................... 235 Responding to an Emergency Call.................235 Responding to an Emergency Alert............... 235 Initiating an Emergency Call.. 236 Initiating an Emergency Call with Voice to Follow.......... 236 Initiating an Emergency Alert. 237 Exiting Emergency Mode....... 237 Man Down Alarms.............................238 Turning Man Down Alarms On and Off........................ 239 Resetting the Man Down Alarms...............................241 Beacon Feature................................ 242 Turning Beacon On and Off... 242 Resetting the Beacon.............243 Text Message Features.................... 244 Writing and Sending a Text Message........................... 244 Sending a Quick Text Message........................... 245 Sending a Quick Text Message with the One Touch Access Button........ 246 Accessing the Drafts Folder...246 Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages..........................248 Managing Sent Text Messages..........................250 Receiving a Text Message.....254 Reading a Text Message....... 254 Managing Received Text Messages..........................254 Privacy.............................................. 257 Making a Privacy-Enabled

(Scrambled) Call............... 259 Security.............................................259 Radio Disable.........................259 Radio Enable..........................260 Password Lock Features.................. 262 Accessing the Radio from Password.......................... 262 Turning the Password Lock On or Off........................... 263 Unlocking the Radio from Locked State..................... 263 C o n t e n t s 11 English Changing the Password.........264 Bluetooth Operation..........................265 Turning Bluetooth On and Off..................................... 265 Finding and Connecting to a Bluetooth Device...............266 Finding and Connecting from a Bluetooth Device

(Discoverable Mode).........267 Disconnecting from a Bluetooth Device...............267 Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speaker and Bluetooth Device............................... 268 Viewing Device Details...........268 Editing Device Name..............268 Deleting Device Name........... 269 Bluetooth Mic Gain.................269 Permanent Bluetooth Discoverable Mode........... 270 Notification List..................................270 Accessing the Notification List.................................... 270 Wi-Fi Operation.................................271 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off..........271 Connecting to a Network Access Point..................... 271 Refreshing the Network List...272 Adding a Network...................273 Viewing Details of Network Access Points................... 273 Removing Network Access Points................................ 274 Utilities.............................................. 275 Turning the Radio Tones/

Alerts On or Off................. 275 Turning Keypad Tones On or Off................................. 275 Setting the Tone Alert Volume Offset Level..........276 Turning the Talk Permit Tone On or Off.................. 277 Turning the Power Up Alert Tone On or Off.................. 277 Setting the Power Level......... 278 Changing the Display Mode...278 Adjusting the Display Brightness......................... 279 Setting the Display Backlight Timer.................................280 Turning the Introduction Screen On or Off...............280 s t n e t n o C 12 English Locking and Unlocking the Keypad..............................281 Language............................... 282 Turning the LED Indicator On or Off........................... 282 Identifying Cable Type........... 283 Voice Announcement.............283 Menu Timer............................284 Digital Mic AGC (Mic AGC-

D)...................................... 284 Intelligent Audio......................285 Turning the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Feature On or Off..............286 Turning the Microphone Dynamic Distortion Control Feature On or Off. 287 Turning GPS/GNSS On or Off..................................... 287 Text Entry Configuration........ 288 Accessing General Radio Information........................ 294 Accessories..................................306 Authorized Accessories List..................................... 307 Antennas...........................................307 Batteries............................................307 Carry Devices................................... 308 Chargers........................................... 308 Earbuds and Earpieces.....................309 Headsets and Headset Accessories.309 Remote Speaker Microphones......... 310 Surveillance Accessories..................310 Miscellaneous Accessories...............311 Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range...............................312 Special Channel Assignments.....................312 Emergency Channel......................... 312 Non-Commercial Call Channel......... 312 Operating Frequency Requirements............312 Declaration of Compliance for the Use of Distress and Safety Frequencies............315 Technical Parameters for Interfacing External Data Sources............................315 Batteries and Chargers Warranty.........316 The Workmanship Warranty........................316 C o n t e n t s 13 English The Capacity Warranty................................316 Limited Warranty....................................317 MOTOROLA COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS........................................... 317 I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW LONG:......................... 317 II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:....................... 318 III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:............................318 IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:.318 V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:..................................................319 VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS:........................................ 319 VII. GOVERNING LAW:...............................321 s t n e t n o C 14 English Declaration of Conformity This declaration is applicable to your radio only if your radio is labeled with the FCC logo shown below. Declaration of Conformity Per FCC CFR 47 Part 2 Section 2.1077(a) Responsible Party Name: Motorola Solutions, Inc. Address: 1303 East Algonquin Road, Schaumburg, IL 60196-1078, U.S.A. Phone Number: 1-800-927-2744 Hereby declares that the product:

Model Name: XPR 7550/XPR 7580/XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e conforms to the following regulations:

FCC Part 15, subpart B, section 15.107(a), 15.107(d) and section 15.109(a) D e c a r a l t i o n o f C o n f o r m i t y 15 English Class B Digital Device As a personal computer peripheral, this device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1 This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2 This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Note:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular in-

stallation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or TV technician for help. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. y t i f m r o n o C f o n o i t a r a c e D l 16 English D c a r a l t i o n d e c o n f o r m i t Appareil numrique de Classe B En tant que priphrique d'ordinateur personnel, cet appareil est conforme aux stipulations de la partie 15 des r-

glements de la FCC. Cet appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. Son utilisation est assujettie aux deux conditions suivantes :

1 Cet appareil ne doit pas causer d'interfrence nuisible. 2 Cet appareil doit accepter toute interfrence reue, y compris les interfrences pouvant entraner un fonction-

nement indsirable. Remarque Ce matriel a fait l'objet de tests et a t dclar conforme aux limites tablies pour un appareil numrique de classe B, comme il est stipul la section 15 des rglements de la FCC. Ces limites sont fixes afin d'offrir une protection suffisante contre des interfrences nuisibles dans une installation rsidentielle. Ce matriel gnre, utilise et peut mettre de l'nergie radiofrquence et, s'il n'est pas install ni utilis confor-

mment aux instructions, il peut provoquer un brouillage nuisible aux communications radio. Cependant, on ne peut garantir qu'il n'y aura aucune interfrence dans une installation particulire. Si cet appareil cause une interfrence nuisible de la rception de la radio ou de la tlvision, ce qui peut tre dtermin en teignant et en allumant l'appareil, vous tes encourag remdier la situation en prenant une ou plusieurs des mesures suivantes :

Rorienter ou dplacer l'antenne rceptrice. Augmenter la distance entre l'quipement et le rcepteur. Brancher l'appareil dans une autre prise sur un circuit diffrent de celui du rcepteur. Consulter un revendeur ou un technicien radio/tlvision chevronn pour obtenir de l'aide. Franais

(Canada) Important Safety Information RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Portable Two-Way Radios ATTENTION!

This radio is restricted to Occupational use only. Before using the radio, read the RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Portable Two-Way Radios which contains important operating instructions for safe usage and RF energy awareness and control for Compliance with applicable standards and Regulations. For a list of Motorola-approved antennas, batteries, and other accessories, visit the following website:

http://www.motorolasolutions.com Any modification to this device, not expressly authorized by Motorola, may void the users authority to operate this device. Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication. This radio transmitter has been approved by Industry Canada to operate with Motorola-approved antenna with the maximum permissible gain and required antenna impedance for each antenna type indicated. Antenna types not included in this list, having a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for that type, are strictly prohibited for use with this device. I m p o r t a n t S a f e t y I n f o r m a t i o n 17 English antenne dont le type et le gain maximal (ou minimal) sont approuvs par Industrie Canada pour cet metteur. Afin de limiter les interfrences radio pour les autres utilisateurs, le type et le gain de l'antenne doivent tre choisis de faon ce que la puissance isotrope rayonne quivalente (P.I.R.E.) ne soit pas plus forte qu'il ne le faut pour tablir la communication. Cet metteur radio a t approuv par Industrie Canada pour utilisation avec une antenne approuve par Motorola offrant le gain maximal autoris et l'impdance requise pour le type d'antenne indiqu. Il est strictement interdit d'utiliser avec cet appareil tout type d'antenne ne figurant pas dans cette liste et prsentant un gain suprieur au maximum indiqu pour le type. Consignes de scurit importantes Radios bidirectionnelles portatives : exposition aux radiofrquences et scurit du produit ATTENTION!

Cette radio ne doit tre utilise qu' des fins professionnelles. Avant d'utiliser la radio, lisez le guide Radios bidirectionnelles portatives : exposition aux radiofrquences et scurit du produit, qui contient d'importantes instructions de fonctionnement pour une utilisation scuritaire et des informations sur l'exposition aux frquences radiolectriques, dans le but dassurer votre conformit aux normes et rglements en vigueur. Visitez le site Web suivant pour obtenir la liste des antennes, des batteries et des autres accessoires approuvs par Motorola :

http://www.motorolasolutions.com Toute modification effectue cet appareil sans l'autorisation explicite de Motorola peut annuler l'autorisation d'utiliser cet appareil. Selon la rglementation d'Industrie Canada, cet metteur radio ne peut tre utilis qu'avec une s e t n a t r o p m i t i r u c s e d s e n g s n o C i English Software Version All the features described in the following sections are supported by the software version R02.50.00 or later. See Checking the Firmware Version and Codeplug Version on page 183 to determine the software version of your radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more details of all the features supported. i n o s r e V e r a w t f o S 18 English Version logicielle Toutes les fonctions dcrites dans les sections suivantes sont prises en charge par la version R02.50.00 ou les versions ultrieures du logiciel de la radio. Consultez la section Checking the Firmware Version and Codeplug Version pour connatre la version logicielle de votre radio. Pour obtenir davantage de renseignements propos des fonctions prises en charge, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. e l l i i e c g o l n o s r e V i English Computer Software Copyrights The Motorola products described in this manual may include copyrighted Motorola computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs including, but not limited to, the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyrighted computer program. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola computer programs contained in the Motorola products described in this manual may not be copied, reproduced, modified, reverse-engineered, or distributed in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, except for the normal non-

exclusive license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. The AMBE+2 voice coding Technology embodied in this product is protected by intellectual property rights including patent rights, copyrights and trade secrets of Digital Voice Systems, Inc. This voice coding Technology is licensed solely for use within this Communications Equipment. The user of this Technology is explicitly prohibited from attempting to decompile, reverse engineer, or disassemble the Object Code, or in any other way convert the Object Code into a human-readable form. U.S. Pat. Nos. #5,870,405, #5,826,222, #5,754,974,

#5,701,390, #5,715,365, #5,649,050, #5,630,011,

#5,581,656, #5,517,511, #5,491,772, #5,247,579,

#5,226,084 and #5,195,166. C o m p u t e r S o f t w a r e C o p y r i g h t s 19 English Handling Precautions The MOTOTRBO Series Digital Portable radio meets IP57 specifications, allowing the radio to withstand adverse field conditions such as being submersed in water. If the radio has been submersed in water, shake the radio well to remove any water that may be trapped inside the speaker grille and microphone port. Trapped water could cause decreased audio performance. If the radios battery contact area has been exposed to water, clean and dry battery contacts on both the radio and the battery before attaching the battery to the radio. The residual water could short-circuit the radio. If the radio has been submersed in a corrosive substance (e.g. saltwater), rinse the radio and battery in fresh water then dry the radio and battery. To clean the exterior surfaces of the radio, use a diluted solution of mild dishwashing detergent and fresh water (i.e. one teaspoon of detergent to one gallon of water). s n o i t u a c e r P g n i l d n a H 20 English Never poke the vent (hole) located on the radio chassis below the battery contact. This vent allows for pressure equalization in the radio. Doing so may create a leak path into the radio and the radios submersibility may be lost. Never obstruct or cover the vent, even with a label. Ensure that no oily substances come in contact with the vent. The radio with antenna attached properly is designed to be submersible to a maximum depth of 1 meter (3.28 feet) and a maximum submersion time of 30 minutes. Exceeding either maximum limit or use without antenna may result in damage to the radio. When cleaning the radio, do not use a high pressure jet spray on the radio as this will exceed the 1 meter depth pressure and may cause water to leak into the radio. Caution:

Do not disassemble the radio. This could damage radio seals and result in leak paths into the radio. Radio maintenance should only be done in service depot that is equipped to test and replace the seal on the radio. Getting Started How to Use This Guide This User Guide covers the basic operation of the MOTOTRBO Portables. However, your dealer or system administrator may have customized your radio for your specific needs. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Throughout this publication, the icons described next are used to indicate features supported in either the conventional Analog mode or conventional Digital mode:

Indicates a conventional Analog Mode-

Only feature. Indicates a conventional Digital Mode-

Only feature. For features that are available in both conventional Analog and Digital modes, no icon is shown. Conventional Analog Mode-Only features are not available in Connect Plus mode of operation. See Connect Plus Operations on page 187 for more information. For features that are available in a conventional multi-

site mode, see IP Site Connect on page 47 for more information. Selected features are also available on the single-site trunking mode, Capacity Plus. See Capacity Plus on page 48 for more information. Selected features are also available in the multi-site trunking mode, Linked Capacity Plus. See Linked Capacity Plus on page 48 for more information. What Your Dealer/System Administrator Can Tell You You can consult your dealer or system administrator about the following:

Is your radio programmed with any preset conventional channels?

Which buttons have been programmed to access other features?

What optional accessories may suit your needs?

G e t t i n g S a r t t e d 21 English What are the best radio usage practices for effective communication?

What maintenance procedures will help promote longer radio life?

d e t r a t S g n i t t e G 22 English Preparing Your Radio for Use Charging the Battery For best performance, your radio is powered by a Motorola-approved Nickel Metal-Hydride (NiMH) or Lithium-Ion (Li-lon) battery. To avoid damage and to ensure compliance with warranty terms, charge the battery using a Motorola charger exactly as described in the charger user guide. It is recommended your radio remains powered off while charging. Charge a new battery 14 to 16 hours before initial use for best performance. Attaching the Battery Note:

If user inadvertently attaches a UL battery to an FM approved radio or vice versa, the certification on the radio will be voided. Your radio can be preprogrammed via CPS to alert you if this battery mismatch occurs. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. This battery mismatch alert feature is only applicable for IMPRES battery and Non-IMPRES battery with kit number programmed in Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EPROM). When the radio is attached with the wrong battery, a low pitched warning tone sounds, the LED lights up blinking red, display shows Wrong Battery and the Voice Announcement/Text-to-Speech sounds Wrong Battery if the Voice Announcement/Text-to-

Speech is loaded via CPS. 1 Align the battery with the rails on the back of the radio. Press the battery firmly, and slide upwards until the latch snaps into place. Slide battery latch into lock position. P r e p a r i n g Y o u r R a d o i f o r U s e 23 English Attaching the Antenna Caution:

If antenna needs to be replaced, ensure that only MOTOTRBO antennas are used. Neglecting this will damage your radio. 1 With the radio turned off, set the antenna in its receptacle and turn clockwise. 2 To remove the antenna, turn the antenna counterclockwise. e s U r o 2 To remove the battery, turn the radio off. Move the

) into unlock position and hold, and battery latch (

slide the battery down and off the rails. f i o d a R r u o Y g n i r a p e r P 24 English A Attaching the Belt Clip 1 To attach the belt clip, align the grooves on the clip with those on the battery and press downward until you hear a click. Attaching the Universal Connector Cover

(Dust Cover)

) is located on the The universal connector (

antenna side of the radio. It is used to connect MOTOTRBO accessories to the radio. P r e p a r i n g Y o u r R a d o i f o r U s e 2 To remove the belt clip, press the belt clip tab away from the battery using a key. Then slide the clip upward and away from the radio. Insert the hooked end of the cover into the slots above the universal connector. Press downward on the cover to seat the lower tab properly into the RF connector. Turn the thumbscrew clockwise to secure the connector cover to the radio. 25 English A To remove the universal connector cover, press down on the cover and turn the thumbscrew counterclockwise. Replace the dust cover when the universal connector is not in use. If the radio is exposed to water, dry the universal connector before attaching an accessory or replacing the dust cover. If the radio is exposed to salt water or contaminants, perform the following cleaning procedure. 1 Mix one tablespoon of mild dishwashing detergent with one gallon of water to produce a 0.5 percent solution. 2 Clean only the external surfaces of the radio with the solution. Apply the solution sparingly with a stiff, nonmetallic, short-bristled brush. 3 Dry the radio thoroughly with a soft and lint-free cloth. Ensure the contact surface of the universal connector is clean and dry. 4 Apply Deoxit Gold Cleaner or Lubricant Pen

(Manufacturer CAIG Labs, Part number G100P) on the contact surface of the universal connector. 5 Attach an accessory to the universal connector to test the connectivity. Note:

Do not submerge the radio in water. Ensure excess detergent does not get trapped in between the universal connector, controls, or crevices. Clean the radio once a month for maintenance. For a harsher environment such as in petrochemical plants or in a high salt density marine environment, clean the radio more often. e s U r o f i o d a R r u o Y g n i r a p e r P 26 English Powering Up the Radio Note:

There is no power up tone if the radio tones/

alerts function is disabled (see Turning the Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off on page 157). Turn off the radio by rotating this knob counterclockwise until you hear a click. You see a brief Powering Down on the display of the radio. Adjusting the Volume P r e p a r i n g Y o u r R a d o i f o r U s e Rotate the On/Off/Volume Control Knob clockwise until you hear a click. You see MOTOTRBO (TM) on the display of the radio momentarily, followed by a welcome message or welcome image. The LED lights up solid green (

screen lights up if the backlight setting is set to turn on automatically. A brief tone sounds, indicating that the power up test is successful.

) and the Home Increase the volume by turning the On/Off/Volume Control Knob clockwise. Decrease the volume by turning this knob counterclockwise. 27 English A Note:

Your radio can be programmed to have a minimum volume offset where the volume level cannot be lowered past the programmed minimum volume. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. e s U r o f i o d a R r u o Y g n i r a p e r P 28 English Identifying Radio Controls Radio Controls 1 Channel Selector Knob 2 On/Off/Volume Control Knob 3 LED Indicator 4 Side Button 1[1]

5 Push-to-Talk (PTT) Button 6 Side Button 2[1]

7 Side Button 3[1]

8 Front Button P1[1]

9 Menu/OK Button 10 4-Way Navigation Button 11 Keypad 12 Back/Home Button 13 Front Button P2[1]

14 Display 15 Microphone 16 Speaker 17 Universal Connector for Accessories 18 Emergency Button[1]

19 Antenna I d e n i t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 1 These buttons are programmable. 29 English 12345678919101817161514131211 Using the 4Way Navigation Button You can use the 4way navigation button,

, to scroll through options, increase/decrease values, and navigate vertically. Category Direction Menu Lists View Details or Vertical Naviga-

tion Vertical Naviga-

tion Vertical Naviga-

tion or

-

-

Previous/Next Item You can use the 4way navigation button, a number, alias, or free form text editor.

, as Editor Catego-

ry Direction or Number

-

Alias Free Form Text Move cursor up/

-

down Numeric Values Increase/

Decrease or Left : Delete last digit Right : -

-

Move cursor one character right/left Move cursor one character right/left l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d I i 30 English Using the Keypad I d e n You can use the 3 x 4 alphanumeric keypad to access your radios features. You can use the keypad to enter subscriber aliases or IDs, and text messages. Many characters require that you press a key multiple times. The next table shows the number of times a key needs to be pressed to generate the required character. Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 1 5

!

1 4

?

2

. 3

, 6

@

7

&

8

'

9

%

10 11

:

12

*

13

#

i t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l A D G J M P T B E H K N Q U C F I L O R V 2 3 4 5 6 S 8 7 31 English Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 5 1 W 9 2 X 3 Y 4 Z 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 0

* or del

# or space Note:

Press to enter 0 and long press to activate the CAPS lock. Another long press to turn off the CAPS lock. Note:

Press during text entry to delete the character. Press during numeric entry to enter a *. Note:

Press during text entry to insert a space. Press during numeric entry to enter a #. Long press to change text entry method. l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d I i 32 English Non-Connect Plus Operations N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s O p e r a t i o n s 33 English Additional Radio Controls in Non-

Connect Plus Mode Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button The PTT button on the side of the radio (

two basic purposes:

) serves While a call is not in progress, the PTT button is used to make a new call (see Making a Radio Call on page 56). If the Talk Permit Tone (see Turning the Talk Permit Tone On or Off on page 158) or the PTT Sidetone is enabled, wait until the short alert tone ends before talking. During a call, if the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled on your radio (programmed by your dealer), you will hear a short alert tone the moment the target radio (the radio that is receiving your call) releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. You will also hear a continuous talk prohibit tone, if your call is interrupted, indicating that you should release the PTT button, for example when the radio receives an Emergency Call. While a call is in progress, the PTT button allows the radio to transmit to other radios in the call. Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. The microphone is activated when the PTT button is pressed. Programmable Buttons Your dealer can program the programmable buttons as shortcuts to radio functions depending on the duration of a button press:

Short press Pressing and releasing rapidly. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n l i s o r t n o C o d a R i l a n o i t i d d A 34 English A Long press Pressing and holding for the programmed duration. Press and hold Keeping the button pressed. Call Alert Note:

The programmed duration of a button press is applicable for all assignable radio/utility functions or settings. See Emergency Operation on page 103 for more information on the programmed duration of the Emergency button. Assignable Radio Functions Audio Profiles Audio Routing Audio Toggle Bluetooth Audio Switch Allows the user to select the preferred audio profile. Toggles audio routing between internal and external speakers. Toggles audio routing between the internal radio speaker and the speaker of wired accessory. Toggles audio routing between internal radio Call Forwarding Call Log Contacts Emergency Intelligent Audio Manual Dial speaker and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory. Provides direct access to the contacts list for you to select a contact to whom a Call Alert can be sent. Toggles Call Forwarding on or off. Selects the call log list. Provides direct access to the Contacts list. Depending on the programming, initiates or cancels an emergency. Toggles intelligent audio on or off. Depending on the programming, initiates a Private or Phone Call by keying in any subscriber ID or phone number. A d d i t i o n a l i R a d o C o n t r o s i l n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 35 English Manual Site Roam[2]

Mic AGC On/Off Monitor Notifications Nuisance Channel Delete[2]

Starts the manual site search. Toggles the internal microphone automatic gain control (AGC) on or off. Monitors a selected channel for activity. Provides direct access to the Notifications list. Temporarily removes an unwanted channel, except for the Selected Channel, from the scan list. The Selected Channel refers to the selected zone or channel combination of the user from which scan is initiated. One Touch Access Directly initiates a predefined Private, Phone or Group Call, a Call Alert or a Quick Text message. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n l i s o r t n o C o d a R i l a n o i t i d d A 36 English Option Board Feature Toggles option board feature(s) on or off for option board-enabled channels. Permanent Monitor Monitors a selected channel Phone Privacy Radio Alias and ID Provides radio alias and ID. Radio Check for all radio traffic until function is disabled. Provides direct access to the Phone Contacts list. Toggles privacy on or off. Determines if a radio is active in a system. Allows a target radio to be remotely enabled. Allows a target radio to be remotely disabled. Turns on the microphone of a target radio without it giving any indicators. Radio Enable Radio Disable Remote Monitor Scan[2]

Site Info Repeater/

Talkaround[2]

Toggles between using a repeater and communicating directly with another radio. Toggles scan on or off. Displays current Linked Capacity Plus site name and ID. Plays site announcement voice messages for the current site (this function is unavailable when Voice Announcement is disabled). Site Lock On/Off[2] When toggled on, the radio searches the current site only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites in addition to the current site. Status Selects the status list menu. Telemetry Control Controls the Output Pin on a Text Message local or remote radio. Selects the text message menu. Transmit Interrupt Remote Dekey Trill Enhancement On/Off Voice Announcement for Channel Voice Announcement On/Off Voice Operating Transmission

(VOX) Zone Stops the transmission of a remote monitored radio without giving any indicators, or an ongoing interruptible call to free the channel. Toggles trill enhancement on or off. Plays zone and channel announcement voice messages for the current channel. This function is unavailable when Voice Announcement is disabled. Toggles voice announcement on or off. Toggles VOX on or off. Allows selection from a list of zones. A d d i t i o n a l i R a d o C o n t r o s i l n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 37 English Assignable Settings or Utility Functions All Tones/Alerts Backlight Backlight Brightness Display Mode Keypad Lock Power Level Toggles all tones and alerts on or off. Toggles display backlight on or off. Adjusts the brightness level. Toggles the day/night display mode on or off. Toggles keypad between locked and unlocked. Toggles transmit power level between high and low. Accessing the Programmed Functions You can access various radio functions through one of the following ways:

2 Not applicable in Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity Plus A short or long press of the relevant programmable buttons. Use the Menu Navigation Buttons as follows:

1 to access the menu. Press the Press appropriate Menu Scroll button (

access the menu functions. or

) to 2 To select a function or enter a sub-menu, press the button. 3 To go back one menu level, or to return to the previous screen, press the button. Long press the screen. button to return to the Home Note:

Your radio automatically exits the menu after a period of inactivity and returns to your Home screen. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n l i s o r t n o C o d a R i l a n o i t i d d A 38 English Identifying Status Indicators Display Icons The 132 x 90 pixels, 256 colors, liquid crystal display

(LCD) of your radio shows radio status, text entries, and menu entries. The following are icons that appear on the display of the radio. Icons are displayed on the status bar, arranged left-most in order of appearance/usage and are channel specific. Received Signal Strength Indicator

(RSSI) The number of bars displayed repre-

sents the radio signal strength. Four bars indicate the strongest signal. This icon is only displayed while receiving. Monitor Selected channel is being monitored. Bluetooth The Bluetooth feature is enabled but there is no remote Bluetooth device con-

nected. Bluetooth Connected The Bluetooth feature is enabled. The icon stays lit when a remote Bluetooth device is connected. Sign In Radio is signed in to the remote server. Sign Out Radio is signed out of the remote server. High Volume Data Radio is receiving high volume data and channel is busy. Job Ticket Notification Notification List has items to review. A d d i t i o n a l i R a d o C o n t r o s i l n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 39 English or Power Level Radio is set at Low power or Radio is set at High power. Tones Disable Tones are turned off. Option Board The Option Board is enabled. Option Board Non-Function The Option Board is disabled. Over-the-Air Programming Delay Tim-

er Indicates time left before automatic re-

start of radio. GPS/GNSS Available The GPS/GNSS feature is enabled. The icon stays lit when a position fix is avail-

able. GPS/GNSS Not Available/Out of Range The GPS/GNSS feature is enabled but is not receiving data from the satellite. Scan[3][4]

Scan feature is enabled. Scan- Priority 1[3][4]

Radio detects activity on channel/group designated as Priority 1. Scan- Priority 2[3][4]

Radio detects activity on channel/group designated as Priority 2. Vote Scan Vote scan feature is enabled. Flexible Receive List Flexible receive list is enabled. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n l i s o r t n o C o d a R i l a n o i t i d d A 40 English Emergency Radio is in Emergency mode. Secure The Privacy feature is enabled. Unsecure The Privacy feature is disabled. Site Roaming[3]

The site roaming feature is enabled. Talkaround[3][4]

In the absence of a repeater, radio is currently configured for direct radio to ra-

dio communication. Battery 3 Not applicable in Capacity Plus The number of bars (0 4) shown indi-

cates the charge remaining in the bat-

tery. Blinks when the battery is low. Wi-Fi Excellent[5]

Wi-Fi signal is excellent. Wi-Fi Good[5]

Wi-Fi signal is good. Wi-Fi Average[5]

Wi-Fi signal is average. Wi-Fi Poor[5]

Wi-Fi signal is poor. Wi-Fi Unavailable[5]

Wi-Fi signal is unavailable. A d d i t i o n a l i R a d o C o n t r o s i l n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 41 English Call Icons The following icons appear on the radios display during a call. These icons also appear in the Contacts list to indicate ID type. Private Call Indicates a Private Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a sub-

scriber alias (name) or ID (number). Group Call/All Call Indicates a Group Call or All Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indi-

cates a group alias (name) or ID

(number). Phone Call as Private Call 4 Not applicable in Linked Capacity Plus 5 Only applicable for XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e Indicates a Phone Call as Private Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indi-

cates a phone alias (name) or ID

(number). Phone Call as Group/All Call Indicates a Phone Call as Group/All Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a group alias (name) or ID

(number). Bluetooth PC Call Indicates a Bluetooth PC Call in prog-

ress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a Bluetooth PC Call alias (name) or ID

(number). Advanced Menu Icons The following icons appear beside menu items that offer a choice between two options or as an indication that there is a sub-menu offering two options. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n l i s o r t n o C o d a R i l a n o i t i d d A 42 English Checkbox (Empty) Indicates the option is not selected. Checkbox (Checked) Indicates the option is selected. Solid Black Box Indicates the option selected for the menu item with a sub-menu. Transmission in Progress (Transi-

tional) Transmitting. This is seen before indi-

cation for Successful Transmission or Failed Transmission. Sent Item Icons The following icons appear at the top right corner of the radios display in the Sent Items folder. Mini Notice Icons The following icons appear momentarily on the radios display after an action to perform task is taken. Successful Transmission (Posi-

tive) Successful action taken. Failed Transmission (Negative) Failed action taken. Sent Successfully The text message is sent successfully. Send Failed The text message has not been sent. OR OR A d d i t i o n a l i R a d o C o n t r o s i l n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 43 English Bluetooth-enabled PTT device, such as a PTT-Only Device (POD). Job Tickets Icons All Jobs Indicates all jobs listed. New Jobs Indicates new jobs. LED Indicator The LED indicator (

your radio.

) shows the operational status of OR In-Progress The text message to a group alias or ID is pending transmission. The text message to a subscriber alias or ID is pending transmission, followed by waiting for acknowledgement. Bluetooth Device Icons The following icons also appear next to items in the list of Bluetooth-enabled devices available to indicate the device type. Bluetooth Data Device Bluetooth-enabled data device, such as a scanner. Bluetooth Audio Device Bluetooth-enabled audio device, such as a headset. Bluetooth PTT Device e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n l i s o r t n o C o d a R i l a n o i t i d d A 44 English list is enabled or all local Linked Capacity Plus channels are busy. Radio is no longer connected to the repeater while in Capacity Plus or Linked Capacity Plus; all Capacity Plus or Linked Capacity Plus channels are currently busy. Auto Roaming is enabled, radio is actively searching for a new site. Also indicates that radio has yet to respond to a group call alert, or radio is locked. Radio is powering up or transmitting. Radio is powering up, receiving a non-

privacy-enabled call or data, or detecting activity, or retrieving Over-

the-Air Programming transmissions over the air. Radio is receiving a privacy-enabled call or data. Double blinking yellow Solid green Blinking green Double blinking green Blinking red Solid yellow Blinking yellow Battery mismatch occurs or radio is transmitting at low battery condition, receiving an emergency transmission or has failed the self-test upon powering up, or has moved out of range if radio is configured with Auto-

Range Transponder System. Radio is monitoring a conventional channel or in Bluetooth Discoverable Mode. Radio is scanning for activity or receiving a Call Alert, flexible receive A d d i t i o n a l i R a d o C o n t r o s i l n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 45 English A Momentary Tone Sounds only once for a short period of time de-

fined by the radio. Indicator Tones High pitched tone Low pitched tone Positive Indicator Tone Negative Indicator Tone Switching Between Conventional Analog and Digital Mode Each channel in your radio can be configured as a conventional analog or conventional digital channel. Use the Channel Selector Knob (

between an analog or a digital channel.

) to switch Note:

While in conventional mode, when the LED blinks green, it indicates the radio detects activity over the air. Due to the nature of the digital protocol, this activity may or may not affect the radio's programmed channel. For Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity Plus, there is no LED indication when the radio is detecting activity over the air. Alert Tones Alert tones provide you with audible indications of the status, or response to data received on the radio. Continuous Tone Periodic Tone Repetitive Tone A monotone sound. Sounds continuously un-

til termination. Sounds periodically de-

pending on the duration set by the radio. Tone starts, stops, and repeats itself. A single tone that re-

peats itself until it is ter-

minated by the user. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n l i s o r t n o C o d a R i l a n o i t i d d A 46 English IP Site Connect This feature allows your radio to extend conventional communication beyond the reach of a single site, by connecting to different available sites which are connected via an Internet Protocol (IP) network. When the radio moves out of range from one site and into the range of another, it connects to the new site's repeater to send or receive calls/data transmissions. Depending on your settings, this is done automatically or manually. If the radio is set to do this automatically, it scans through all available sites when the signal from the current site is weak or when the radio is unable to detect any signal from the current site. It then locks on to the repeater with the strongest Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) value. In a manual site search, the radio searches for the next site in the roam list that is currently in range (but which may not have the strongest signal) and locks on to it. Note:

Each channel can only have either Scan or Roam enabled, not both at the same time. When switching from digital to analog mode, certain features are unavailable. Icons for the digital features

(such as Messages) reflect this change by appearing grayed out. Disabled features are hidden in the menu. Your radio also has features available in both analog and digital mode. However, the minor differences in the way each feature works does not affect the performance of your radio. Note:

Your radio also switches between digital and analog modes during a dual mode scan (see Scan on page 80). A d d i t i o n a l i R a d o C o n t r o s i l n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 47 English A Channels with this feature enabled can be added to a particular roam list. The radio searches the channel(s) in the roam list during the automatic roam operation to locate the best site. A roam list supports a maximum of 16 channels

(including the Selected Channel). Note:

You cannot manually add or delete an entry to the roam list. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Capacity Plus Capacity Plus is a single-site trunking configuration of the MOTOTRBO radio system, which uses a pool of channels to support hundreds of users and up to 254 Groups. This feature allows your radio to efficiently utilize the available number of programmed channels while in Repeater Mode. You hear a negative indicator tone if you try to access a feature not applicable to Capacity Plus via a programmable button press. Your radio also has features that are available in conventional digital mode, IP Site Connect, Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity Plus. However, the minor differences in the way each feature works does not affect the performance of your radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information on this configuration. Linked Capacity Plus Linked Capacity Plus is a multi-site multi-channel trunking configuration of the MOTOTRBO radio system, combining the best of both Capacity Plus and IP Site Connect configurations. Linked Capacity Plus allows your radio to extend trunking communication beyond the reach of a single site, by connecting to different available sites which are connected via an Internet Protocol (IP) network. It also provides an increase in capacity by efficiently utilizing the combined available number of programmed channels supported by each of the available sites. When the radio moves out of range from one site and into the range of another, it connects to the new site's repeater to send or receive calls/data transmissions. Depending on your settings, this is done automatically or manually. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n l i s o r t n o C o d a R i l a n o i t i d d A 48 English If the radio is set to do this automatically, it scans through all available sites when the signal from the current site is weak or when the radio is unable to detect any signal from the current site. It then locks on to the repeater with the strongest Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) value. In a manual site search, the radio searches for the next site in the roam list that is currently in range (but which may not have the strongest signal) and locks on to it. Any channel with Linked Capacity Plus enabled can be added to a particular roam list. The radio searches these channels during the automatic roam operation to locate the best site. Note:

You cannot manually add or delete an entry to the roam list. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Similar to Capacity Plus, icons of features not applicable to Linked Capacity Plus are not available in the menu. You hear a negative indicator tone if you try to access a feature not applicable to Linked Capacity Plus via a programmable button press. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information on this configuration. A d d i t i o n a l i R a d o C o n t r o s i l n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 49 English e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s l l i i a C g n v e c e R d n a g n k a M i Making and Receiving Calls in Non-

Connect Plus Mode Selecting a Zone A zone is a group of channels. Your radio supports up to 1000 channels and 250 zones, with a maximum of 160 channels per zone. 1 Access the Zone feature. Steps Radio Con-

trols Programmed Zone button Radio menu Press the programmed Zone button. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Zone and press to select. The current zone is displayed and indicated by a

. 50 English 2 Select the required zone. Steps Radio Con-

trol or or zone. and scroll to the required Key-

pad 1 Enter the first character of the re-

quired zone. 2 A blinking cursor appears allowing you to continue entering the subse-

quent characters of the required zone. Note:

to move one space to Press the left. Press to move one space to the right. Press the key to delete any unwant-

ed characters. Long press to change the text entry method. Steps Radio Con-

trol Note:

The first line of the display shows the characters you keyed in. The second line shows a zone that matches what you have already keyed in. The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more with the same name, the radio displays the zone that is listed first in the zone list. 3 to select. Press The display shows <Zone> Selected momentarily and returns to the selected zone screen. Selecting a Channel Transmissions are sent and received on a channel. Depending on your radios configuration, each channel may have been programmed differently to support different groups of users or supplied with different features. After selecting the relevant Zone, select the relevant channel you require to transmit or receive on. M a k n g i a n d R e c e v n g C a i i l l s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e Turn the programmed Channel Selector Knob to select the channel, subscriber alias or ID, or group alias or ID. Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call Once the channel, subscriber ID, or group ID is displayed, you can proceed to receive and respond to calls. 51 English The LED lights up solid green while the radio is transmitting and blinks green when the radio is receiving. Note:

The LED lights up solid green while the radio is transmitting and double blinks green when the radio is receiving a privacy-enabled call. To unscramble a privacy-enabled call, your radio must have the same Privacy Key, OR the same Key Value and Key ID (programmed by your dealer), as the transmitting radio (the radio you are receiving the call from). See Privacy on page 129 for more information. Receiving and Responding to a Group Call To receive a call from a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that group. When you receive a Group Call (while on the Home screen), the LED blinks green. The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias. The second text line displays the group call alias. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the radio's speaker. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s l l i i a C g n v e c e R d n a g n k a M i 52 English 1 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond. If the Voice Interrupt feature is enabled, press the PTT button to stop the current call from the transmitting radio and free the channel for you to talk/respond. The LED lights up solid green. 2 Wait for one of the following tones to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. The Talk Permit Tone The PTT Sidetone 3 Release the PTT button to listen. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. Note:

See Making a Group Call on page 57 for details on making a Group Call. Receiving and Responding to a Private Call A Private Call is a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. When you receive a Private Call, the LED blinks green. The Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker of the radio. 1 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond. If the Voice Interrupt feature is enabled, press the PTT button to stop the current call from the transmitting radio and free the channel for you to talk/respond. The LED lights up solid green. 2 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended. See Making a Private Call on page 58 for details on making a Private Call. Receiving an All Call An All Call is a call from an individual radio to every radio on the channel. It is used to make important announcements requiring the users full attention. When you receive an All Call, a tone sounds and the LED blinks green. The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias. The second text line displays All Call. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the radio speaker. M a k n g i a n d R e c e v n g C a i i l l s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 53 English Once the All Call ends, the radio returns to the previous screen before receiving the call. An All Call does not wait for a predetermined time before ending. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is now available for use. You cannot respond to an All Call. Note:

See Making an All Call on page 59 for details on making an All Call. Note:

The radio stops receiving the All Call if you switch to a different channel while receiving the call. During an All Call, you will not be able to use any programmed button functions until the call ends. Receiving and Responding to a Selective Call A Selective Call is a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. It is a Private Call on an analog system. When you receive a Selective Call, the LED blinks green. The Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias or Selective Call or Alert with Call. The first text line shows the Private Call icon. The radio displays Selective Call or Alert with Call. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the radio's speaker. 1 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 2 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The LED lights up solid green. 3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended. See Making a Private Call on page 58 for details on making a Private Call. Receiving and Responding to a Phone Call e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s l l i i a C g n v e c e R d n a g n k a M i 54 English Phone Call as Private Call When you receive a Phone Call as a Private Call, the Phone Call icon appears in the top right corner; the display shows the caller alias or Phone Call. If Phone Call capability is not enabled on your radio, the first line of the display shows Unavailable and your radio mutes the call. Your radio returns to the previous screen when the call ends. Phone Call as Group Call When you receive a Phone Call as a Group Call, the Phone Group Call icon appears in the top right corner; the display shows the group alias and Phone Call. If Phone Call capability is not enabled on your radio, the display shows Unavailable and your radio mutes the call. 1 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to listen. 1 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to listen. 2 to end the call. Press The display shows Ending Phone Call. If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows Call Ended. If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows Call Ended. If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat this step or wait for the telephone user to end the call. 2 to end the call. Press The display shows Ending Phone Call. If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows Call Ended. If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat this step or wait for the telephone user to end the call. M a k n g i a n d R e c e v n g C a i i l l s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 55 English Phone Call as All Call When you receive a Phone Call as an All Call, the Phone Call icon appears in the top right corner; the display shows All Call and Phone Call. If Phone Call capability is not enabled on your radio, the first line of the display shows Unavailable and your radio mutes the call. Your radio returns to the previous screen when the call ends. Note:

When you receive a Phone Call as an All Call, you can respond to the call or end the call, only if an All Call type is assigned to the channel. 1 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to listen. 2 to end the call. Press The display shows Ending Phone Call. If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows All Call and Call Ended. If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat this step to end the call. Making a Radio Call After selecting your channel, you can select a subscriber alias or ID, or group alias or ID by using:

The Channel Selector Knob. A programmed One Touch Access button The One Touch Access feature allows you to make a Group or Private Call to a predefined ID easily. This feature can be assigned to a short or long programmable button press. You can ONLY have one ID assigned to a One Touch Access button. Your radio can have multiple One Touch Access buttons programmed. The programmed number keys This method is for Group, Private and All Calls only and is used with the keypad (see Making a Group, Private or All Call with the Programmable Number Key on page 63). A programmable button This method is for Phone Calls only (see Making a Phone Call with the Programmable Phone Button on page 64). The Contacts list (see Contact Settings on page 82). Manual Dial This method is for Private and Phone Calls only and is dialed using the keypad e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s l l i i a C g n v e c e R d n a g n k a M i 56 English

(see Making a Phone Call from Contacts on page 85, Making a Private Call from Contacts on page 84, and Making a Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button on page 66). Note:

Your radio must have the Privacy feature enabled on the channel to send a privacy-

enabled transmission. Only target radios with the same Privacy Key OR the same Key Value and Key ID as your radio will be able to unscramble the transmission. Note:

See Privacy on page 129 for more information. Making a Group Call To make a call to a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that group. 1 Do one of the following. Select the channel with the active group alias or ID. See Selecting a Channel on page 51. Press the programmed One Touch Access button. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the group call alias. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. You see the Group Call icon, the group alias or ID, and transmitting radio alias or ID on your display. 5 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. Radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. M a k n g i a n d R e c e v n g C a i i l l s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 57 English Note:

You can also make a Group Call via Contacts

(see Making a Group Call from Contacts on page 83). Making a Private Call While you can receive and/or respond to a Private Call initiated by an authorized individual radio, your radio must be programmed for you to initiate a Private Call. There are two types of Private Calls. The first type, where a radio presence check is performed prior to setting up the call, while the other sets up the call immediately. Only one of these call types can be programmed to your radio by your dealer. You will hear a negative indicator tone, when you make a Private Call via the One Touch Access button, the programmed number keys, or the Channel Selector Knob, if this feature is not enabled. Use the Text Message or Call Alert features to contact an individual radio. See Text Message Features on page 111 or Call Alert Operation on page 101 for more information. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s l l i i a C g n v e c e R d n a g n k a M i 58 English 1 Do one of the following. Select the channel with the active subscriber alias or ID. See Selecting a Channel on page 51. Press the programmed One Touch Access button. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The Private Call icon appears on the top right corner. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The second text line displays the call status. 4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. 6 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended. Your radio may be programmed to perform a radio presence check prior to setting up the Private Call. If the target radio is not available, you hear a short tone and see negative mini notice on the display. You can also make a Private Call via Contacts (see Making a Private Call from Contacts on page 84) or perform a quick alphanumeric search for the required alias via a keypad entry (see Making a Group, Private, Phone or All Call by Alias Search on page 89). Making an All Call This feature allows you to transmit to all users on the channel. Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. Users on the channel cannot respond to an All Call. 1 Select the channel with the active All Call group alias or ID. See Selecting a Channel on page 51. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green.The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows All Call. 4 Wait for one of the following tones to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. The Talk Permit Tone The PTT Sidetone Making a Selective Call Just like a Private Call, while you can receive and/or respond to a Selective Call initiated by an authorized individual radio, your radio must be programmed for you to initiate a Selective Call. 1 Select the channel with the active subscriber alias or ID. See Selecting a Channel on page 51. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. M a k n g i a n d R e c e v n g C a i i l l s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. 59 English The LED lights up solid green. The Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The second text line displays the call status. 4 Wait for one of the following tones to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. The Talk Permit Tone The PTT Sidetone 5 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. The display shows Call Ended. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s l l i i a C g n v e c e R d n a g n k a M i 60 English Making a Phone Call with the One Touch Access Button 1 Press the programmed One Touch Access button to make a Phone Call to the predefined alias or ID. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. If the access code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the display shows Access Code:. to proceed. Enter the access code and press The LED lights up solid green. The Phone Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The second text line displays the call status. If the call-setup is successful, the DTMF tone sounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephone user. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The Phone Call icon remains in the top right corner. If the call-setup is unsuccessful, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Failed. Your radio returns to the Access Code input screen. If the access code was preconfigured in the Contacts list, the radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to listen. To enter extra digits, if requested by the Phone Call, enter the extra digits using the keypad and to proceed. press The DTMF tone sounds with each keypad press, and the radio returns to the previous screen. 4 to end the call. Press If de-access code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the display shows De-Access Code:. Do one of the following. Enter the de-access code and press proceed. The radio returns to the previous screen. to Press the One Touch Access button. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. The DTMF tone sounds with each keypad press, and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If the end-call-setup is successful, a tone sounds and the display shows Call Ended. If the end-call-setup is unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat Step 4 or wait for the telephone user to end the call. Note:

When the telephone user ends the call, a tone sounds and the display shows Call Ended. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the Phone Call, your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. During channel access, press dismiss the call attempt. A tone sounds to indicate success. to M a k n g i a n d R e c e v n g C a i i l l s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 61 English During the call, if you press the One Touch Access button with the deaccess code preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as the input for extra digits, your radio attempts to end the call. The access or deaccess code cannot be more than 10 characters. Making a Private Call with a One Touch Call Button Note:

Programmable buttons press must be initiated from the Home screen. The One Touch Call feature allows you to easily make a Private Call to a pre-defined Private Call alias or ID. This feature can be assigned to a short or long programmable button press. You can ONLY have one alias or ID assigned to a One Touch Call button. Your radio can have multiple One Touch Call buttons programmed. 1 Press the programmed One Touch Call button to make a Private Call to the pre-defined Private Call alias or ID. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The display shows the Private Call alias or ID. 4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. 6 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you will hear a short alert tone the moment the target radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s l l i i a C g n v e c e R d n a g n k a M i 62 English Making a Group, Private or All Call with the Programmable Number Key The Programmable Number Key feature allows you to make a Group, Private or All Call to a predefined alias or ID easily. This feature can be assigned to all the available number keys on a keypad. You can ONLY have one alias or ID assigned to a number key, but you can have more than one number key associated to an alias or ID. 1 Long press the programmed number key, when you are on the Home screen, to make a Group, Private or All Call to the predefined alias or ID. If the number key is not associated to an entry, a negative indicator tone sounds. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The Group/Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias. The second text line displays either the call status for a Private Call or All Call for All Call. 4 Wait for one of the following tones to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. The Talk Permit Tone the PTT Sidetone (Group Call only) 5 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. 6 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. Radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. For a Private Call, you hear a short tone when the call ends. See Assigning an Entry to a Programmable Number Key on page 90 for details on assigning an entry to a number key on the keypad. M a k n g i a n d R e c e v n g C a i i l l s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 63 English e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s l l i i a C g n v e c e R d n a g n k a M i Making a Phone Call with the Programmable Phone Button 1 Press the programmed Phone button to enter into the Phone Entry list. 2 or to the required subscriber alias or ID, to select. and press If the access code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the display shows Access Code:. button Enter the access code and press the to proceed. The LED lights up solid green. The Phone Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The second text line displays the call status. If the call-setup is successful, the DTMF tone sounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephone user. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The Phone Call icon remains in the top right corner. The second text line displays the call status. If call-setup is unsuccessful, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Failed. Your radio returns to the Access Code input screen. If the access code was preconfigured in the Contacts list, the radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. 3 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 4 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to listen. 5 To enter extra digits, if requested by the Phone Call, do one of the following. Press any keypad key to begin the input of the extra digits. The first line of the display shows Extra Digits:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the extra digits and press the DTMF tone sounds and the radio returns to the previous screen. button to proceed. The Press One Touch Access button. The DTMF tone sounds. If the entry for the One Touch 64 English 6 Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. to end the call. Press If deaccess code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line of the display shows De-

Access Code:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the deaccess code button to proceed. The radio and press the returns to the previous screen. The DTMF tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If the end-call-setup is successful, a tone sounds and the display shows Call Ended. If the end-call-setup is unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat Steps 4 and 6 or wait for the telephone user to end the call. When you press PTT button while in the Phone Contacts screen, a tone sounds and the display shows Press OK to Place Phone Call. When the telephone user ends the call, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the Phone Call, your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. Note:

to During channel access, press dismiss the call attempt and a tone sounds. During the call, when you press One Touch Access button with the deaccess code preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as the input for extra digits, your radio attempts to end the call. Note:

The access or deaccess code cannot be more than 10 characters. M a k n g i a n d R e c e v n g C a i i l l s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 65 English Making a Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. Making a Private Call 1 Press the programmed Manual Dial button to enter into the Manual Dial screen. 2 to Radio Contact and press or select. The display shows Number:. to 8 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you will hear a short alert tone the moment the target radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended. 3 Use the keypad to enter a subscriber alias. Making a Phone Call 4 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 5 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The second text line displays the call status. 6 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. 1 Press the programmed Manual Dial button to enter into the Manual Dial screen. 2 to Phone Contact and press or select. The display shows Number:. to 3 Use the keypad to enter a subscriber alias. If the access code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the display shows Access Code:. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s l l i i a C g n v e c e R d n a g n k a M i 66 7 Release the PTT button to listen. English button Enter the access code and press the to proceed. The LED lights up solid green. The Phone Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The second text line displays the call status. If the call-setup is successful, the DTMF tone sounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephone user. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The Phone Call icon remains in the top right corner. If the call-setup is unsuccessful, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Failed. Your radio returns to the Access Code input screen. If the access code was preconfigured in the Contacts list, the radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. 4 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 5 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to listen. 6 To enter extra digits, if requested by the Phone Call, do one of the following. Press any keypad key to begin the input of the extra digits. Enter the extra digits and press the button to proceed. The DTMF tone sounds and the radio returns to the previous screen. Press One Touch Access button. The DTMF tone sounds. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. 7 to end the call. Press If deaccess code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the display shows De-Access Code:. Enter the deaccess code and press the button to proceed. The radio returns to the previous screen. The DTMF tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. M a k n g i a n d R e c e v n g C a i i l l s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 67 English If the end-call-setup is successful, a tone sounds and the display shows Call Ended. If the end-call-setup is unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat Step 7 or wait for the telephone user to end the call. When you press PTT button while in the Phone Contacts screen, a tone sounds and the display shows Press OK to Place Phone Call. When the telephone user ends the call, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the Phone Call, your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. Note:

to During channel access, press dismiss the call attempt and a tone sounds. Note:

During the call, when you press One Touch Access button with the deaccess code preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as the input for extra digits, your radio attempts to end the call. Note:

The access or deaccess code cannot be more than 10 characters. Stopping a Radio Call This feature allows you to stop an ongoing Group or Private Call to free the channel for transmission. For example, when a radio experiences a stuck microphone condition where the PTT button is inadvertently pressed by the user. Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. 1 Press the programmed Transmit Interrupt Remote Dekey button, while on the relevant channel. The display shows Remote Dekey. 2 Wait for acknowledgement. If successful, the radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display shows Remote Dekey Success, indicating that the channel is now free. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s l l i i a C g n v e c e R d n a g n k a M i 68 English If unsuccessful, the radio sounds a negative indicator tone and the display shows Remote Dekey Failed. Talkaround You can continue to communicate when your repeater is not operating, or when your radio is out of the repeaters range but within talking range of other radios. This is called talkaround. Note:

This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity Plus. The Talkaround setting is retained even after powering down. You can toggle between talkaround and repeater modes by pressing the programmed Repeater/

Talkaround button or using the radio menu as described next. Note:

This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band channels that are in the same frequency. 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Talkaround and press to You can also use option. or to change the selected to enable/disable the Talkaround. Press The display shows The beside Enabled. disappears from beside Enabled. Monitoring Features M a k n g i a n d R e c e v n g C a i i l l s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 69 English Note:

This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity Plus. 1 Press the programmed Permanent Monitor button to activate permanent monitoring of the channel. Radio sounds an alert tone, the LED lights up solid yellow, and the display shows Permanent Monitor On. The Monitor icon appears on the display. 2 Press the programmed Permanent Monitor button to exit Permanent Monitor mode. Radio sounds an alert tone, the LED turns off, and the display shows Permanent Monitor Off. Monitoring a Channel Use the Monitor feature to make sure a channel is clear before transmitting. This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity Plus. 1 Press and hold the programmed Monitor button and listen for activity. The Monitor icon appears on the display and the LED lights up solid yellow. You hear radio activity or total silence, depending on how your radio is programmed. This indicates that the channel is in use. The LED double blinks yellow when channel is busy. 2 Wait until you hear white noise. This indicates that the channel is free. 3 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to listen. Permanent Monitor e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s l l i i a C g n v e c e R d n a g n k a M i 70 Use the Permanent Monitor feature to continuously monitor a selected channel for activity. English Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode Radio Check If enabled, this feature allows you to determine if another radio is active in a system without disturbing the user of that radio. No audible or visual notification is shown on the target radio. This feature is only applicable for subscriber aliases or IDs. Sending a Radio Check 1 Access the Radio Check feature. Steps Radio Control Pro-

gram-

med Ra-

dio Check button 2 1 Press the programmed Radio Check button. Radio Control Menu Steps 1 2 to access the menu. or to Contacts and press to select. 3 Use one of the steps described next to select the required sub-

scriber alias or ID:

Select the subscriber alias or ID directly. or to the required subscriber alias or ID and press to select. Use the Manual Dial menu. to Manual Dial or A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e or to the required subscrib-

er alias or ID and press lect. to se-

and press to select. 71 English Radio Control Steps e d o M s u P l or to Radio Number to select. and press If there was previously dialed ID, the ID appears along with a blinking cursor. Else, the first line of the display shows Radio Number:; the second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Use the key-

pad to edit/enter the ID, and button is pressed when the radio is If the waiting for acknowledgement, a tone sounds, and the radio terminates all retries and exits Radio Check mode. If Radio Check is successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If Radio Check is unsuccessful, a negative indicator tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. Radio returns to the subscriber alias or ID screen. press to select. or to Radio Check and 4 press to select. The display shows transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The LED lights up solid green. 2 Wait for acknowledgement. Remote Monitor Use the Remote Monitor feature to turn on the microphone of a target radio (subscriber alias or IDs only). The green LED will blink once on the target subscriber. You can use this feature to monitor, remotely, any audible activity surrounding the target radio. Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 72 English Initiating Remote Monitor 1 Access the Remote Monitor feature. Radio Control Steps Radio Control Program-

med Re-

mote Mon-

itor Button Menu Steps 1 Press the programmed Remote Monitor button. 2 1 2 or to the required sub-

scriber alias or ID and press to select. to access the menu or to Contacts and press to select 3 Use one of the steps described next to select the required sub-

scriber alias or ID select the subscriber alias or ID directly or to the required subscriber alias or ID and press to select. use the Manual Dial menu to Manual Di or al and press lect. to se-

or to Radio Num to se-

ber and press lect. If there was previously di-

aled ID, the ID appears along with a blinking cur-

sor. Else, the first line of the display shows Radio Number:; the second line of the display shows a A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 73 English Radio Control Steps blinking cursor. Use the keypad to edit/enter the ID, and press lect. to se-

or to Remote Mon. and 4 press to select. The display shows transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The LED lights up solid green. If unsuccessful, the radio sounds a negative indicator tone the display shows negative mini notice. Stopping Remote Monitor Remote Monitor automatically stops after a programmed duration or when there is any user operation on the target radio. Follow the steps below to manually stop Remote Monitor. 1 Press the programmed Transmit Interrupt Remote Dekey button. The display shows transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The LED lights up solid green. 2 Wait for acknowledgement. 2 Wait for acknowledgement. If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. Your radio starts playing audio from the monitored radio for a programmed duration and display shows Rem. Monitor. Once the timer expires, the radio sounds an alert tone and the LED turns off. If successful, the radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display shows positive mini notice. If unsuccessful, the radio sounds a negative indicator tone and the display shows negative mini notice. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 74 English Scan Lists Scan lists are created and assigned to individual channels/groups. Your radio scans for voice activity by cycling through the channel/group sequence specified in the scan list for the current channel/

group. Your radio can support up to 250 scan lists, with a maximum of 16 members in a list. Each scan list supports a mixture of both analog and digital entries. You can add, delete, or prioritize channels by editing a scan list. You can attach a new scan list to your radio via Front Panel Programming. Note:

This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity Plus. Viewing an Entry in the Scan List 3 or to Scan List and press to select. 4 Use or to view each member on the list. The Priority icon appears left of the members alias, if set, to indicate whether the member is on a Priority 1 or Priority 2 channel list. You cannot have multiple Priority 1 or Priority 2 channels in a scan list. There is no Priority icon if priority is set to None. Viewing an Entry in the Scan List by Alias Search 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Scan and press to select. or to Scan List and press to select. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 1 2 to access the menu. 4 Key in the first character of the required alias. A blinking cursor appears. or to Scan and press to select. 5 Use the keypad to type the required alias. 75 English to move one space to the left. Press Press move one space to the right. Press the to delete any unwanted characters. Long press to key to change text entry method. The first line of the display shows the characters you keyed in. The next lines of the display show the shortlisted search results. The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more entries with the same name, the radio displays the entry that is listed first in the scan list. Editing the Scan List Adding a New Entry to the Scan List 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Scan and press to select. or to Scan List and press to select. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 76 English 4 or select. to Add Member and press to 5 Select the required alias or ID by performing one Steps of the following actions:

Radio Control Radio Naviga-

tion But-

tons Keypad Key in the first character of the re-

or to the required alias or ID. quired alias. A blinking cursor appears. to move one space to the left. to move one space to the key to delete Press Press right. Press the any unwanted characters. Long press to change the text entry method. Radio Control Steps The first line of the display shows the characters you keyed in. The next lines of the display show the short list-

ed search results. The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more aliases with the same name, the radio displays the alias that is listed first in the list. 6 7 Press to select. or to the required priority level and press to select. The display shows positive mini notice, followed immediately by Add Another?. 8 Do one of the following:

or to Yes and press repeat Steps 5 to 7. to select, and A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e or to No and press current list. to save the Deleting an Entry from the Scan List 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Scan and press to select. or to Scan List and press to select. 4 Select the required alias or ID by performing one Steps of the following actions:

Radio Control Radio Naviga-

tion But-

tons Keypad Key in the first character of the re-

or to the required alias or ID. quired alias. 77 English Radio Control Steps A blinking cursor appears. to move one space to the left. to move one space to the key to delete Press Press right. Press the any unwanted characters. Long press to change the text entry method. The first line of the display shows the characters you keyed in. The next lines of the display show the short list-

ed search results. The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more aliases with the same name, the radio displays the alias that is listed first in the list. Press to select. or to Delete and press to select. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 78 5 6 English 7 Do one of the following:

or to Yes and press to delete entry. The display shows positive mini notice. or to No and press previous screen. to return to the 8 Repeat Steps 4 to 7 to delete other entries. After deleting all required aliases or IDs, long press to return to the Home screen. Setting and Editing Priority for an Entry in the Scan List 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Scan and press to select. or to Scan List and press to select. 4 Select the required alias or ID by performing one Steps of the following actions:

Radio Control Radio Naviga-

tion But-

tons Keypad Key in the first character of the re-

or to the required alias or ID. quired alias. A blinking cursor appears. to move one space to the left. to move one space to the key to delete Press Press right. Press the any unwanted characters. Long press to change the text entry method. The first line of the display shows the characters you keyed in. The next lines of the display show the short list-

ed search results. The alias search is Radio Control Steps case-insensitive. If there are two or more aliases with the same name, the radio displays the alias that is listed first in the list. 5 6 7 Press to select. or select. to Edit Priority and press to or to the required priority level and press to select. The display shows positive mini notice before returning to the previous screen. Note:

The Priority icon appears left of the name of the member. There is no Priority icon if priority is set to None. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 79 English Scan When you start a scan, your radio cycles through the programmed scan list for the current channel looking for voice activity. The LED blinks yellow and the scan icon appears on the status bar. During a dual mode scan, if you are on a digital channel, and your radio locks onto an analog channel, it automatically switches from digital mode to analog mode for the duration of the call. This is also true for the reverse. There are two ways of initiating scan:

Main Channel Scan (Manual): Your radio scans all the channels/groups in your scan list. On entering scan, your radio may (depending on the settings) automatically start on the last scanned active channel/group or on the channel where scan was initiated. Auto Scan (Automatic): Your radio automatically starts scanning when you select a channel/group that has Auto Scan enabled. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A Note:

This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity Plus. Starting and Stopping Scan While scanning, the radio will only accept data (e.g. text message, location, or PC data) if received on its Selected Channel. 1 Use the Channel Selector Knob to select a channel programmed with a scan list. 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or to Scan and press to select. or select. or to select. to Scan State and press to to required scan state and press 80 English The display shows Scan On when Scan is enabled. The LED blinks yellow and the scan icon appears. The display shows Scan Off if Scan is disabled. The LED turns off and the scan icon disappears. Responding to a Transmission During a Scan During scanning, your radio stops on a channel/group where activity is detected. The radio stays on that channel for a programmed time period known as hang time. 1 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. 2 Press the PTT button during hang time. The LED lights up solid green. 3 Wait for one of the following tones to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. The Talk Permit Tone The PTT Sidetone 4 Release the PTT button to listen. If you do not respond within the hang time, the radio returns to scanning other channels/groups. Deleting a Nuisance Channel If a channel continually generates unwanted calls or noise (termed a nuisance channel), you can temporarily remove the unwanted channel from the scan list. This capability does not apply to the channel designated as the Selected Channel. Deleting a nuisance channel is only possible through the programmed Nuisance Channel Delete button. This feature is not accessible through the menu. 1 When your radio locks on to an unwanted or nuisance channel, press the programmed Nuisance Channel Delete button until you hear a tone. 2 Release the Nuisance Channel Delete button. The nuisance channel is deleted. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 81 English Restoring a Nuisance Channel To restore the deleted nuisance channel, do one of the following:

Turn the radio off and then power it on again. Stop and restart a scan via the programmed Scan Change the channel via the Channel Selector button or menu. Knob. Vote Scan Vote Scan provides you with wide area coverage in areas where there are multiple base stations transmitting identical information on different analog channels. Your radio scans analog channels of multiple base stations and performs a voting process to select the strongest received signal. Once that is established, your radio unmutes to transmissions from that base station. The LED blinks yellow and the vote scan icon appears on the status bar. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 82 English To respond to a transmission during a Vote Scan, follow the same procedures as Responding to a Transmission During a Scan on page 81. Contact Settings Contacts provides address-book capabilities on your radio. Each entry corresponds to an alias or ID that you use to initiate a call. Each entry, depending on context, associates with one of five types of calls: Group Call, Private Call, All Call, PC Call or Dispatch Call. PC Call and Dispatch Call are data-related. They are only available with the applications. Refer to the data applications documentation for more information. Note:

If the Privacy feature is enabled on a channel, you can make privacy-enabled Group Call, Private Call, and All Call on that channel. Only target radios with the same Privacy Key, or the same Key Value and Key ID as your radio will be able to unscramble the transmission. See Privacy on page 129 for more information. Additionally, Contacts menu allows you to assign each entry to a programmable number key or more on a keypad. If an entry is assigned to a number key, your radio can perform a quick dial on the entry. Your radio supports two Contacts lists, one for Analog contacts and one for Digital contacts, with a maximum of 500 members for each Contacts list. Each entry within Contacts displays the following information:

Call Type Call Alias Call ID Note:

You can add or edit subscriber IDs for the Digital Contacts list. Deleting subscriber IDs can only be performed by your dealer. For the Analog Contacts list, you can only view the subscriber IDs, edit the subscriber IDs, and initiate a Call Alert. Adding and deleting capabilities can only be performed by your dealer. Making a Group Call from Contacts 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Contacts and press to select. The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the required group alias or ID. 4 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 5 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. 6 Wait for one of the following tones to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. The Talk Permit Tone The PTT Sidetone 7 Release the PTT button to listen. When any user in the group responds, the LED blinks green. You see the Group Call icon, the group ID, and the users ID on your display. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 83 English 8 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. Making a Private Call from Contacts 1 2 to access the menu. or to Contacts and press to select. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 Use one of the steps described next to select the required subscriber alias or ID:

select the subscriber alias or ID directly to the required subscriber alias or or ID and press to select. use the Manual Dial menu e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 84 English or to select. to Manual Dial and press or to Radio Number and press to select. If there was previously dialed subscriber alias or ID, the alias or ID appears along with a blinking cursor. Else, the first line of the display shows Radio Number:; the second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to edit/enter the ID. Press to select. 4 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 5 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The display shows the destination alias. 6 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 7 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green and the display shows the transmitting user's ID. 8 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. The display shows Call Ended. Making a Phone Call from Contacts 1 2 to access the menu. or to Contacts and press to select. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 Use one of the steps described next to select the required subscriber alias or ID:

select the subscriber alias or ID directly or to the required subscriber alias or ID and press to select. use the Manual Dial menu or to select. or to select. to Manual Dial and press to Phone Number and press The first line of the display shows Phone Number: , the second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to enter a telephone number, and press to select the entered number. If the entry selected is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Invalid # . When you press PTT button while in the Phone Contacts screen, a negative indicator tone sounds and the display shows Press OK to Place Phone Call. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 85 English 4 or select. to Call Phone and press to 5 If the access code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line of the display shows Access Code: . The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the access code and press to proceed. to dismiss the During channel access, press call attempt and a negative indicator tone sounds. Your radio returns to the Call Phone screen. The access code cannot be more than 10 characters. The first line of the display shows Calling. The second line of the display shows the subscriber alias or ID, and the Phone Call icon. If successful, the DTMF tone sounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephone user. The first line of the display shows the subscriber alias or ID, and the RSSI icon. The second line of the display shows Phone Call and the Phone Call icon. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 86 English If unsuccessful, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Failed. Your radio returns to the Access Code input screen. If the access code was preconfigured in the Contacts list, the radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. 6 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 7 Do one of the following:

Press the PTT button to talk and release it to listen. Note:

The RSSI icon disappears during transmission. To enter extra digits, if requested by the Phone Call, press any keypad key to begin the input of extra digits. The first line of the display shows Extra Digits: . The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the extra digits and press to proceed. The DTMF tone sounds and the radio returns to the previous screen. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the Phone Call, your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. Press One Touch Access button. Note:

The DTMF tone sounds. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. During the call, when you press One Touch Access button with the deaccess code preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as the input for extra digits, your radio attempts to end the call. During channel access and access/deaccess code or extra digits transmission, your radio responds to On/Off/Volume Control Knob and Channel Selector Knob only. A tone sounds for every invalid input. 8 Press to end the call. 9 If deaccess code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line of the display shows De-

Access Code:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the deaccess code to proceed. and press The deaccess code cannot be more than 10 characters. The DTMF tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. Your radio returns to the Call Phone screen. If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat Steps 8 and 9 or wait for the telephone user to end the call. When the telephone user ends the call, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 87 English Making a Call Alias Search You can also use alias or alphanumeric search to retrieve the required subscriber alias. This feature is only applicable while in Contacts. Note:

button or Press to exit alias search. If you release the PTT button while the radio is setting up the call, it exits without any indication and returns to the previous screen. Your radio may be programmed to perform a radio presence check prior to setting up the Private Call. If the target radio is not available, you hear a short tone and see negative mini notice on the display. The radio returns to the menu prior to initiating the radio presence check. to access the menu. or to Contacts and press to select. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 1 2 e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 88 English 3 Key in the first character of the required alias. A blinking cursor appears. 4 Use the keypad to type the required alias. to move one space to the left. Press Press move one space to the right. Press the to delete any unwanted characters. Long press to key to change text entry method. The first line of the display shows the characters you keyed in. The next lines of the display show the short listed search results. The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more entries with the same name, the radio displays the entry that is listed first in the Contacts list. 5 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 6 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The display shows the destination alias. 7 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 8 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. 9 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. The display shows Call Ended. Making a Group, Private, Phone or All Call by Alias Search You can also use alias or alphanumeric search to retrieve the required subscriber alias. This feature is only applicable while in Contacts. Note:

Press button or to exit alias search. If you release the PTT button while the radio is setting up the call, it exits without any indication and returns to the previous screen. Your radio may be programmed to perform a radio presence check prior to setting up the Private Call. If the target radio is not available, you hear a short tone and see Party Not Available on the display; the radio returns to the menu prior to initiating the radio presence check. to access the menu. or to Contacts and press to select. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 1 2 3 Key in the first character of the required alias. A blinking cursor appears. 4 Use the keypad to type the required alias. Press to move one space to the left. Press to move one space to the right. Press the to delete any unwanted characters. key A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 89 English The first line of the display shows the characters you keyed in. The second line of the display shows an alias that matches what you have keyed in. The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more entries with the same name, the radio displays the entry that is listed first in the Contacts list. 5 or to scroll to desired entry, if necessary. 6 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 7 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The first line displays the target radios ID. The second line displays the call type and the Call icon. 8 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. 9 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. 10 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you will hear a short alert tone the moment the target radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond. If there is no voice activity for a programmed period of time, the call ends. You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended. Assigning an Entry to a Programmable Number Key Note:

See Making a Group, Private or All Call with the Programmable Number Key on page 63 for details on making a Group, Private or All Call with the programmed number key(s). 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Contacts and press to select. The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the required alias or ID and press to select. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 90 English 4 5 or select. to Program Key and press to or to the desired number key and press to select. If the number key is currently assigned to another entry, the display shows The Key is Already Assigned and then, the first line of the display shows Overwrite?. Do one of the following. or to Yes and press the number key assignment. to overwrite or to No and press previous step. to return to the Menu Each entry can be associated to different number keys. You see a before each number key that is assigned to an entry. If the is before Empty, that number key is not assigned. If a number key is assigned to an entry in a particular mode, this feature is not supported when you long press the number key in another mode. The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display shows positive mini notice. The screen automatically returns to the previous menu. Removing the Association between Entry and Programmable Number Key 1 Access the required alias or ID via:

Radio Control Program-

med num-

ber key Steps Long press the programmed number key to the required alias or ID; press to select. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Contacts and press to select. The entries are al-

phabetically sorted. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 91 English Radio Control Steps The screen automatically returns to the previous menu. 3 or to the required sub-

Adding a New Contact scriber alias or ID and press to select. or select. to Program Key and press to or to Empty and press to select. The first line of the display shows Clear from all keys? . 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Contacts and press to select. or select. to New Contact and press to or to the required contact type, either Radio Contact or Phone Contact, and press or to Yes and press to select. Note:

When an entry is deleted, the association between the entry and its programmed number key(s) is removed. The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display shows positive mini notice. to select. 5 Use the keypad to enter the contact number and press to confirm. 6 Use the keypad to enter the contact name and press to confirm. 2 3 4 e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 92 English 7 If adding a Radio Contact, or to the required ringer type and press The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display shows positive mini notice. to select. Setting a Default Contact 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or or to Contacts and press to select. to the required alias or ID and press to select. to to Set as Default and press or select. The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display shows positive mini notice. A ID. appears beside the selected default alias or Call Indicator Settings Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Call Alert You can select, or turn on or off ringing tones for a received Call Alert. 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Tones/Alert and press to to Call Ringers and press to A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 93 English 6 7 to Call Alert and press or select. The current tone is indicated by a

. to or select. to the required tone and press to You can also use option. or to change the selected appears beside selected tone. Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Private Calls You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a received Private Call. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 94 English 3 4 5 6 or select. or select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Tones/Alerts and press to to Call Ringers and press to to Private Call and press to You can also use option. or to change the selected Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Selective Call You can select, or turn on or off ringing tones for a received Selective Call. 1 to access the menu. 2 3 4 5 6 7 or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Tones/Alert and press to to Call Ringers and press to to Selective Call and press or select. The current tone is indicated by a

. to You can also use option. or to change the selected or select. to the required tone and press to appears beside selected tone. Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Text Message You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a received Text Message. 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Tones/Alerts and press to to Call Ringers and press to A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 95 English 6 7 to Text Message and press or select. The current tone is indicated by a

. to or select. to the required tone and press to appears beside selected tone. Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Telemetry Status with Text You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a received Telemetry Status with Text. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 96 English to Tones/Alerts and press to to Call Ringers and press to 4 5 6 or select. or select. or The current tone is indicated by a to Telemetry and press

. to select. 7 Do one of the following:

or to the preferred tone and press to select. The display shows Tone <Number>

Selected and a appears left of the selected tone. or to Turn Off and press to select. The display shows Telemetry Ringer Off and a appears left of Turn Off. Assigning Ring Styles Selecting a Ring Alert Type You can program your radio to sound one of ten predefined ringing tones when receiving a Call Alert or a Text Message from a particular contact. The radio sounds out each ring style as you navigate through the list. 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or to Contacts and press to select. The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the required alias or ID and press to select. or select. to Edit Ringtone and press to or select. to the required tone and press appears beside selected tone. to Note:

The programmed Ring Alert Type button is assigned via CPS. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. You can program the radio calls to one predetermined vibrate call. If All Tones status is disabled, the radio displays the All Tone Mute icon. If All Tones status is enabled, the related ring alert type is displayed. The radio sounds one vibration if it is a momentary ring style. The radio vibrates repetitively if it is a repetitive ring style. When set to Ring and Vibrate, the radio sounds a specific ring tone if there is any incoming radio transaction (for example, Call Alert or Message). It sounds like a good key tone or missed call. For radios with batteries that support the vibrate feature and are attached to a vibrating belt clip, the available Ring Alert Type options are Silent, Ring, Vibrate, and Ring and Vibrate. For radios with batteries that do not support the vibrate feature and are not attached to a vibrating belt A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 97 English clip, Ring Alert Type is automatically set to Ring. The available Ring Alert Type options are Silent and Ring. You can select a Ring Alert Type by performing one of the following actions. Press the programmed Ring Alert Type button to access the Ring Alert Type menu. a) Press or to Ring, Vibrate, Ring &

Vibrate or Silent and press to select. Access this feature via the menu. a) b) Press to access the menu. Press to select. c) Press press d) Press or or to Utilities and press to Radio Settings and to select. or to Tones/Alerts and press to select. e) Press or to Ring Alert Type and press f) Press to select. or to Ring, Vibrate, Ring &

Vibrate or Silent and press to select. Configuring Vibrate Style Note:

The programmed Vibrate Style button is assigned via CPS. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. Vibrate Style is enabled when the Vibrating Belt Clip is attached to the radio with a battery that supports the vibrate feature. You can configure the vibrate style by performing one of the following actions. Press the programmed Vibrate Style button to access the Vibrate Style menu. a) Press or to Short, Medium, or Long e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 98 English and press to select. Access this feature via the menu. Press to access the menu. a) b) Press to select. c) Press press d) Press or or to Utilities and press to Radio Settings and to select. or to Tones/Alerts and press to select. or e) Press to select. or f) Press to Short, Medium, or Long and press to select. Escalating Alarm Tone Volume You can program your radio to continually alert you when a radio call remains unanswered. This is done by automatically increasing the alarm tone volume over time. This feature is known as Escalert. Call Log Features Your radio keeps track of all recent outgoing, answered, and missed Private Calls. Use the call log feature to view and manage recent calls. You can perform the following tasks in each of your call lists:

Store ID to Contacts Delete View Details Viewing Recent Calls 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Call Log and press to select. to preferred list and press or select. The display shows the most recent entry at the top of the list. to to Vibrate Style and press The lists are Missed, Answered, and Outgoing. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 99 English 4 or to view the list. Press the PTT button to start a Private Call with the current selected alias or ID. Storing an Alias from a Call List You can also store an ID without an alias. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Call Log and press to select. or select. to the required list and press to or to Store and press to select. A blinking cursor appears. If needed, key in the alias for that ID and press shows positive mini notice. The display Deleting a Call from a Call List 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or to Call Log and press to select. to to the required list and press or select. When you select a call list and it contains no entries, the display shows List Empty, and sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on

(see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page 152). or to the required alias or ID and press to select. or select. to Delete Entry? and press to 6 Do one of the following:

e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 100 English Press The display shows Entry Deleted. to select Yes to delete the entry. or to No, and press the return to the previous screen. button to Viewing Details from a Call List 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or to Call Log and press to select. or select. to the required list and press to or to the required alias or ID and press to select. to View Details and press or select. Display shows details. to Call Alert Operation Call Alert paging enables you to alert a specific radio user to call you back when they are able to do so. This feature is applicable for subscriber aliases or IDs only and is accessible through the menu via Contacts or manual dial. Receiving and Responding to a Call Alert When you receive a Call Alert page, you see the notification list listing a Call Alert with the alias or ID of the calling radio on the display. When you hear a repetitive tone and the LED blinks yellow, do one of the following:

Press the PTT button while the display still shows the Call Alert in the Notification List to respond with a Private Call. Press is moved to the Missed Call Log. to exit the Notification List. The alert See Notification List on page 146 for details about the Notification List. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 101 English See Call Log Features on page 99 for details about the Missed Call List. Making a Call Alert from the Contact List e d o M s u P l 1 2 to access the menu. or to Contacts and press to select. 4 3 Use one of the steps described next to select the required subscriber alias or ID:

select the subscriber alias or ID directly to the required subscriber alias or or ID and press to select. use the Manual Dial menu or to select. or to select. to Manual Dial and press to Radio Number and press t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 102 English The first line of the display shows Radio Number: , the second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the subscriber ID you want to page and press

. to to Call Alert and press or select. The display shows Call Alert and the subscriber alias or ID, indicating that the Call Alert has been sent. The LED lights up solid green when your radio is sending the Call Alert. If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, the display shows positive mini notice. If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received, the display shows negative mini notice. Making a Call Alert with the One Touch Access Button Press the programmed One Touch Access button to make a Call Alert to the predefined alias or ID. The display shows Call Alert and the subscriber alias or ID, indicating that the Call Alert has been sent. The LED lights up solid green when your radio is sending the Call Alert. If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, the display shows positive mini notice. If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received, the display shows negative mini notice. Emergency Operation An Emergency Alarm is used to indicate a critical situation. You are able to initiate an Emergency at any time on any screen display even when there is activity on the current channel. Your dealer can set the duration of a button press for the programmed Emergency button, except for long press, which is similar with all other buttons:

Short press Between 0.05 seconds and 0.75 seconds. Long press Between 1.00 second and 3.75 seconds. The Emergency button is assigned with the Emergency On/Off feature. Check with your dealer for the assigned operation of the Emergency button. Note:

If the short press for the Emergency button is assigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then the long press for the Emergency button is assigned to exit the Emergency mode. If the long press for the Emergency button is assigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then the short press for the Emergency button is assigned to exit the Emergency mode. Your radio supports three Emergency Alarms:

Emergency Alarm Emergency Alarm with Call Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow Note:

Only one of the Emergency Alarms above can be assigned to the programmed Emergency button. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e In addition, each alarm has the following types:

Regular Radio transmits an alarm signal and shows audio and/or visual indicators. 103 English Silent Radio transmits an alarm signal without any audio or visual indicators. Radio receives calls without any sound through the radios speaker, until you press the PTT button to initiate the call. Silent with Voice Radio transmits an alarm signal without any audio or visual indicators, but allow incoming calls to sound through the radios speaker. Receiving an Emergency Alarm On receiving an emergency alarm the emergency icon appears, a tone sounds, the LED blinks red and the radio displays the emergency caller alias. If more than one alarm has occurred all emergency caller aliases are displayed in an Alarm List. 1 When receiving an emergency alarm, do one of the following:

If a single emergency call alias is displayed, to view more details. Press press again to view your action details. If the multiple emergency caller aliases are displayed in the Alarm List, to the or e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A required alias and press to view more 104 English details. Press items. again to view your action 2 Press and select Yes to exit the Alarm List. To revisit the Alarm List, press menu and select Alarm List. to access the Responding to an Emergency Alarm 1 In the Alarm List, or to the required alias. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you will hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is now available for use. 3 Press PTT button to transmit non-emergency voice to the same group that the Emergency Alarm was targeted to. Emergency voice can only be transmitted by the emergency initiating radio. All other radios

(including the emergency receiving radio) transmit non-emergency voice. The LED lights up solid green. Your radio remains in the Emergency mode. 4 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. When the emergency initiating radio responds, the LED blinks green. You see the Group Call icon, the group ID, and transmitting radio ID on your display. 6 Your radio displays the Alarm List. Exiting Emergency Mode After Receiving the Emergency Alarm Exit the Emergency mode by performing one of the following actions:

Delete the alarm items, see Deleting an Alarm Item from the Alarm List for more information. Power down the radio. Sending an Emergency Alarm This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm, a non-voice signal, which triggers an alert indication on a group of radios. If your radio is set to Silent, it does not display any audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode. Press the programmed Emergency On button. The display shows one of the following:

Tx Alarm and the destination alias. Tx Telegram and the destination alias. The LED lights up solid green and the Emergency icon appears on the Home screen display. When an Emergency Alarm acknowledgement is received, the Emergency tone sounds and the LED blinks green. The display shows Alarm Sent. If your radio does not receive an Emergency Alarm acknowledgement, and after all retries have A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 105 English been exhausted, a tone sounds and the display shows Alarm Failed. Radio exits the Emergency Alarm mode and returns to the Home screen. Sending an Emergency Alarm with Call This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm to a group of radios. Upon acknowledgement by a radio within the group, the group of radios can communicate over a programmed Emergency channel. If your radio is set to Silent, it does not display any audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode, or allow any received calls to sound through the speaker of the radio, until you press the PTT button to initiate the call. If your radio is set to Silent with Voice, it does not display any audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode, but allow incoming calls to sound through the speaker of the radio. The indicators only appear once you press the PTT button to initiate, or respond to, the call. 1 Press the programmed Emergency On button. The display shows one of the following:

Tx Alarm and the destination alias. Tx Telegram and the destination alias. The LED lights up solid green and the Emergency icon appears on the Home screen display. When an Emergency Alarm acknowledgement is received, the Emergency tone sounds and the LED blinks green. The display shows Alarm Sent. Your radio enters the emergency call mode when the display shows Emergency and the destination group alias. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green and the Group icon appears on the display. 4 Wait for one of the following tones to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. The Talk Permit Tone The PTT Sidetone 5 Release the PTT button to listen. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 106 English If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. 6 Press the PTT button to respond. 7 Once your call ends, press Emergency Off button to exit the Emergency mode. Sending an Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm to a group of radios. The microphone of your radio is automatically activated, allowing you to communicate with the group of radios without pressing the PTT button. This activated microphone state is also known as hot mic. If your radio has Emergency Cycle Mode enabled, repetitions of hot mic and receiving period are made for a programmed duration. During Emergency Cycle Mode, received calls sound through the speaker of the radio. If you press the PTT button during the programmed receiving period, you hear a prohibit tone, indicating that you should release the PTT button. The radio ignores the PTT press and remains in Emergency mode. Note:

If you press the PTT button during hot mic, and continue to press it after the hot mic duration expires, the radio continues to transmit until you release the PTT button. If your radio is set to Silent, it does not display any audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode, or allow any received calls to sound through the speaker of the radio, until the programmed hot mic transmission period is over, and you press the PTT button. If your radio is set to Silent with Voice, it does not display any audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode when you are making the call with hot mic, but allow sound through the speaker of the radio when the target radio responds after the programmed hot mic transmission period is over. The indicators only appear when you press the PTT button. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 107 English Note:

If the Emergency Alarm request fails, the radio does not retry to send the request, and enters the hot mic state directly. 1 Press the programmed Emergency On button. The display shows one of the following:

Tx Alarm and the destination alias. Tx Telegram and the destination alias. The LED lights up solid green and the Emergency icon is displayed. 2 Once the display shows Alarm Sent, speak clearly into the microphone. When hot mic has been enabled, the radio automatically transmits without a PTT button press until the hot mic duration expires. While transmitting, the LED lights up solid green and the Emergency icon appears on the display. 3 The radio automatically stops transmitting when the cycling duration between hot mic and receiving calls expires, if Emergency Cycle Mode is enabled. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 108 English 4 Once the hot mic duration expires, the radio automatically stops transmitting. To transmit again, press the PTT button. Reinitiating an Emergency Mode Note:

This feature is only applicable to the radio sending the Emergency Alarm. There are two instances where this can happen:

You change the channel while the radio is in Emergency mode. This exits the Emergency mode. If Emergency Alarm is enabled on this new channel, the radio reinitiates Emergency. You press the programmed Emergency On button during an Emergency initiation/transmission state. This causes the radio to exit this state, and to reinitiate Emergency. Exiting Emergency Mode After Sending the Emergency Alarm Your radio exits Emergency mode when one of the following occurs:

Emergency Alarm acknowledgement is received

(for Emergency Alarm only). All retries to send the alarm have been exhausted. The Emergency Off button is pressed. Note:

If your radio is powered off, it exits the Emergency mode. The radio will not reinitiate the Emergency mode automatically when it is turned on again. If you change channels when your radio is in Emergency mode to a channel that has no emergency system configured, No Emergency is shown on your display. Man Down Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e only. This feature prompts an emergency to be raised if there is a change in the motion of the radio, such as the tilt of the radio, motion and/or the lack of motion for a predefined time. Following a change in the motion of the radio for a programmed duration, the radio pre-warns the user via an audio indicator indicating that a change in motion is detected. If there is still no acknowledgment by the user before the predefined reminder timer expires, the radio initiates an Emergency Alarm or an Emergency Call. You can program the reminder timer via CPS. Turning the Man Down Feature On or Off Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e only. The programmed Man Down button and Man Down settings are assigned via CPS. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. If you disable the Man Down feature, the programmed alert tone sounds repeatedly until the Man Down feature is enabled. A device failure tone sounds when the Man Down feature fails while powering up. The device failure tone continues until the radio resumes normal operation. If you enable Man Down to maximum sensitivity and set Vibrate Style to high, the radio automatically restricts Vibrate Style to medium. This function prevents high Vibrate A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 109 English Style from initiating the Man Down emergency feature. You can enable or disable this feature by performing one of the following actions. Press the programmed Man Down button to toggle the feature on or off. Access this feature via the menu. The disappears beside Enabled. Analog Message Encode Your radio is able to send pre-programmed messages from the Message list to a radio alias or to the dispatcher. Sending MDC Message Encode to Dispatcher a) b) d) e) Press to access the menu. Press to select. c) Press or or to Utilities and press to Radio Settings and press to select. Press to select. or to Man Down and press You can also use selected option. or to change the Press This display shows to enable or disable Man Down. beside Enabled. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Message and press to select. or select. to Quick Text and press to to to the required message. Press or send. The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 110 English If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. Writing and Sending a Text Message 1 Access the Text Message feature. Text Message Features Your radio is able to receive data, for example a text message, from another radio or an e-mail application. The maximum length of characters for sending a text message, including the subject line (seen when receiving message from an e-mail application), depends on CPS configuration which can be configured up to maximum 280 characters. Your radio can receive a text message with maximum length of 280 characters. If user forwards a text message with characters more than the maximum length, the text message will be truncated to the maximum length. The radio exits the current screen once the inactivity timer expires. Any text message in the writing/editing screen will automatically be saved to the Drafts folder. Note:

Long press Home screen. at any time to return to the Radio Con-

trols Programmed Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Messages and press to select. 2 or to Compose and press A blinking cursor appears. to select. 3 Use the keypad to type your message. Press the Press the to move one space to the left. Press key to move one space to the right. key to delete any unwanted or A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 111 English characters. Long press method. to change text entry 4 Press once message is composed. 5 Depending on whether you want to send, save, re-

edit, or delete the newly composed message, do one of the following. or to Send, and press to send the message. or to Save, and press message to the Drafts folder. to save the to edit the message. to choose between deleting the message or saving it to the Drafts folder. The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 112 English If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. If the text message fails to send, the radio returns you to the Resend option screen (see Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages on page 115. Sending a Quick Text Message with the One Touch Access Button Press the programmed One Touch Access button to send a predefined Quick Text message to a predefined alias or ID. The display shows the transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows the positive mini notice. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows the negative mini notice. If the text message fails to send, the radio returns you to the Resend option screen (see Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages on page 115). Accessing the Drafts Folder You can save a text message to send it at a later time. If a PTT button press or a mode change causes the radio to exit the text message writing/editing screen while you are in the process of writing or editing a text message, your current text message is automatically saved to the Drafts folder. The most recent saved text message is always added to the top of the Drafts list. The Drafts folder stores a maximum of ten (10) last saved messages. When the folder is full, the next saved text message automatically replaces the oldest text message in the folder. Note:

Long press Home screen. Viewing a Saved Text Message 1 Access the Text Message feature. at any time to return to the to select. Radio Con-

trols Programmed Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Messages and press to select. 2 3 or or to Drafts and press to select. to the required message and press A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e Editing and Sending a Saved Text Message 1 2 Press again while viewing the message. or to Edit and press to select. 113 English A blinking cursor appears. 3 Use the keypad to type your message. to move one space to the left. Press key to move one space to the right. key to delete any unwanted Press the Press the characters. Long press method. to change text entry or 4 Press once message is composed. 5 Select the message recipient by or to the required alias or ID and press to select. or to Manual Dial, and press to select. The first line of the display shows Radio Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A ID and press

. 114 English The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. If the text message cannot be sent, it is moved to the Sent Items folder and marked with a Send Failed icon. Deleting a Saved Text Message from Drafts 1 Access the Text Message feature. Radio Con-

trols Programmed Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Messages and press to select. 2 3 4 or or to Drafts and press to select. to the required message and press to select. or to Delete and press text message. to delete the Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages You can select one of the following options while at the Resend option screen:

Resend Forward Edit Note:

If the channel type (i.e. conventional digital or Capacity Plus or Linked Capacity Plus) is not a match, you can only edit and forward a Fail-

to-Send message. Resending a Text Message to resend the same message to the Press same subscriber/group alias or ID. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows the positive mini notice. If the message cannot be sent, the display shows the negative mini notice. Forwarding a Text Message Select Forward to send the message to another subscriber/group alias or ID. 1 or to Forward and press to select. 2 Select the message recipient by or to the required alias or ID and press to select. or to Manual Dial, and press to select. The first line of the display shows Radio Number:. The second line of the display shows A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 115 English a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or ID and press

. The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. Editing a Text Message Select Edit to edit the message before sending it. Note:

If a subject line is present (for messages received from an e-mail application), you cannot edit it. 1 or to Edit and press A blinking cursor appears. to select. 2 Use the keypad to edit your message. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 116 English to move one space to the left. Press key to move one space to the right. key to delete any unwanted Press the Press the characters. Long press method. to change text entry or 3 Press once message is composed. 4 Depending on whether you want to send, save, re-

edit, or delete the newly composed message, do one of the following. or to Send, and press to send the message. or to Save, and press message to the Drafts folder. to save the to edit the message. to choose between deleting the message or saving it to the Drafts folder. 5 If you are sending the message, select the recipient by or to the required alias or ID and press to select. or to Manual Dial, and press to select. The first line of the display shows Radio Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or ID and press

. The display shows Text Message:

<Subscriber/Group Alias or ID>, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. Managing Sent Text Messages Once a message is sent to another radio, it is saved in Sent Items. The most recent sent text message is always added to the top of the Sent Items list. The Sent Items folder is capable of storing a maximum of thirty (30) last sent messages. When the folder is full, the next sent text message automatically replaces the oldest text message in the folder. Note:

Long press Home screen. at any time to return to the Viewing a Sent Text Message 1 Access the Text Message feature by performing Steps one of the following actions:

Radio Con-

trols Programmed Text Message button Menu 1 2 Press the programmed Text Message button. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e to access the menu. or to Messages and press to select. 117 English 2 3 or select. to Sent Items and press to or to the required message and press to select. A subject line may be shown if the message is from an e-mail application. The icon at the top right corner of the screen indicates the status of the message (see Sent Item Icons on page 43). Sending a Sent Text Message You can select one of the following options while viewing a sent text message:

Resend Forward Edit Delete Note:

If the channel type (i.e. conventional digital or Capacity Plus or Linked Capacity Plus) is not e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 118 English a match, you can only edit, forward, or delete a Sent message. 1 2 Press again while viewing the message. or to one of the following options and press Option Steps to select. For ward Edit De lete Re send Select Forward to send the selected text message to another subscriber/

group alias or ID (see Forwarding a Text Message on page 115). Select Edit to edit the selected text message before sending it (see Editing a Text Message on page 116). Select Delete to delete the text mes-

sage. Select Resend to resend the selected text message to the same subscriber/

group alias or ID. Option Steps Option Steps The display shows transitional mini no-

tice, confirming that the same message is being sent to the same target radio. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows pos-

itive mini notice. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows neg-

ative mini notice. If the message fails to send, the radio returns you to the Resend option screen. Press to resend the message to the same subscriber/group alias or ID. Note:

Changing the volume, and pressing any button, except for

,

, returns you to

, or the message. The radio exits the Resend op-

tion screen if you press the PTT button to initiate a Private or Group Call, or to respond to a Group Call. The radio also exits the screen when it receives a text or telemetry message, an emergency call or alarm, or a call alert. The display returns to the Re send option screen if you press the PTT button to respond to a Private Call (except when the radio is displaying the Missed Call screen), and at the end of an All Call. If you exit the message sending screen while the message is being sent, the radio updates the status of the message in the Sent Items folder without providing any indication in the display or via sound. If the radio changes mode or powers down before the status of the message in Sent Items is updated, the radio cannot complete any In-

A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 119 English Progress messages and automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon. The radio supports a maximum of five (5) In-

Progress messages at one time. During this period, the radio cannot send any new message and automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon. Deleting All Sent Text Messages from Sent Items 1 Access the Text Message feature by performing Steps one of the following actions:

Radio Con-

trols Programmed Text Message button Menu Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Messages and 2 3 to to Sent Items and press or select. When you select Sent Items and it contains no text messages, the display shows List Empty, and sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on (see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page 152). or select. to Delete All and press to 4 Choose one of the following. or to Yes and press to select. The display shows positive mini notice. or to No and press previous screen. to return to the press to select. Receiving a Text Message When your radio receives a message, the display shows the alias or ID of the sender and the Message icon. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 120 English You can select one of the following options when receiving a text message:

Read Read Later Delete Note:

The radio exits the Text Message alert screen and sets up a Private or Group Call to the sender of the messageif the PTT button is pressed when the radio is displaying the alert screen. Reading a Text Message 1 or to Read? and press to select. Selected message in the Inbox opens. A subject line may be shown if the message is from an e-mail application. 2 Do one of the following:

Press to return to the Inbox. Press delete the text message. a second time to reply, forward, or Managing Received Text Messages Use the Inbox to manage your text messages. The Inbox is capable of storing a maximum of 30 messages. Text messages in the Inbox are sorted according to the most recently received. Your radio supports the following options for text messages:

Reply Forward Delete Delete All Note:

If the channel type (i.e. conventional digital or Capacity Plus or Linked Capacity Plus) is not a match, you can only forward, delete, or delete all Received messages. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 121 English Note:

Long press Home screen. at any time to return to the Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Messages and press to select. or or to Inbox and press to select. to view the messages. A subject line may be shown if the message is from an e-mail application. 5 Do one of the following:

Press to select the current message, and press that message. again to reply, forward, or delete e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 122 English Long press to return to the Home screen. Viewing a Telemetry Status Text Message from the Inbox 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or to Messages and press to select. or or to Inbox and press to select. to the required message and press to select. You cannot reply to a Telemetry Status text message. The display shows Telemetry: <Status Text Message>. Long press to return to the Home screen. Replying to a Text Message from the Inbox 4 1 Access the Text Message feature. Press once more to access the sub-menu. Radio Con-

trols Programmed Text Message button Menu Steps 5 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Messages and or to Reply and press to select. or select. to Quick Reply and press to A blinking cursor appears. 6 Use your keypad to write/edit your message. press to select. 7 2 3 or or to Inbox and press to select. to the required message and press to select. A subject line may be shown if the message is from an e-mail application. once message is composed. Press The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 123 English If the message cannot be sent, the radio returns you to the Resend option screen (see Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages on page 115). Deleting a Text Message from the Inbox 1 Access the Text Message feature by performing Steps one of the following actions:

Radio Con-

trols Programmed Text Message button Menu Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Messages and press to select. 2 3 or or to Inbox and press to select. to the required message and press e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A to select. 124 English 4 5 6 A subject line may be shown if the message is from an e-mail application. Press once more to access the sub-menu. or to Delete and press to select. or to Yes and press to select. The display shows positive mini notice and the screen returns to the Inbox. Deleting All Text Messages from the Inbox 1 Access the Text Message feature by performing Steps one of the following actions:

Radio Con-

trols Programmed Text Message button Menu 1 Press the programmed Text Message button. to access the menu. Radio Con-

trols Steps 2 or to Messages and press to select. or to Inbox and press to select. When you select Inbox and it contains no text messages, the display shows List Empty, and sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on

(see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page 152). or select. to Delete All and press to or to Yes and press to select. The display shows positive mini notice. 2 3 4 Job Tickets Your radio is able to receive Job Tickets, which are messages from the dispatcher listing out tasks that need to be performed. You can respond to Job Tickets in order to sort them into Job Ticket Folders. By default, the folders are All", "New", "Started", and "Completed". Check with your dealer or system administrator for an additional 10 folders. Your radio supports a maximum of 100 Job Tickets, all of which can be seen in the "All" folder. New Job Tickets and Job Tickets with recent change in state are listed first. Upon reaching the maximum number of Job Tickets, the next Job Ticket automatically replaces the last Job Ticket in your radio. Note:

Job Tickets are retained even after radio is powered down and powered up again. Your radio will automatically detect and discard the duplicated Job Tickets with the same subject line. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 125 English Accessing the Job Ticket Folder Steps Access the Job Ticket folder. Radio Control Pro-

gram-

med Job Ticket button button. or press 2 1 Press the programmed Job Ticket to the required folder and to select. Note:

You can also press and the corresponding num-

ber key (19) to access the required folder. Menu 1 2 to access the menu. or to Job Tickets and press to select. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 126 English Radio Control Steps 3 4 or to the required folder and press to select. Note:

You can also press and the corresponding num-

ber key (19) to access the required folder. or to the required Job Ticket and press to select. Logging In and Out of the Remote Server This feature allows you to log in and log out of the remote server by using your user ID via the menu. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Log In and press to select. If you are already logged in, menu displays Log Out. The display shows a transitional mini notice, confirming that you have been logged in successfully. If you have failed to log in, the display shows a negative mini notice. Creating and Sending a Job Ticket Your radio is able to create Job Tickets, which is based on a Job Ticket template and send out tasks that need to be performed. Note:

CPS is required to configure the Job Ticket template. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. 1 2 to access the menu. or select. to Job Tickets and press to 3 or select. to Create Ticket and press to 4 Depending on how your radio is configured, do Then one of the following:

If If your radio is configured with one Job Ticket template, 1 Use the keypad to type the required room number and press or to select. to Room Status and press or to select. to the required 2 3 option and press lect. to se-

or to the required op-

tion and press to select. If your radio is configured with more than one Job Ticket tem-

plate, A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 127 English 5 or to Send and press to select. The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your message is sent. If the message is not sent, the display shows negative mini notice. Responding to the Job Ticket e d o M s u P l to access the menu. or select. to Job Tickets and press to to the required folder and press or select. You can also press the corresponding number key

(19) to access the required folder. to or to the required Job Ticket and press to select. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 1 2 3 4 128 English 5 6 once more to access the sub-menu. Press You can also press the corresponding number key

(19) to Quick Reply. or to the required Job Ticket and press to select. You can also press the corresponding number key

(19) to respond to the job ticket. The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your message being sent. If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. Deleting a Job Ticket Delete a Job Ticket. Steps Radio Control Steps Radio Control Pro-

gram-

med Job Ticket button Menu 1 Press the programmed Job Ticket button. 2 1 2 3 4 or select. to All and press to to access the menu. or to Job Tickets and press to select. or select. or to All and press to to the required Job Tick-

et and press to select. Privacy A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t Note:

At Step 4, while viewing the Job Ticket, press delete. to Press Job Ticket. again while viewing the or to Delete and press 5 6 to select. Note:

You can also press delete. to l P u s M o d e If enabled, this feature helps to prevent eavesdropping by unauthorized users on a channel by the use of a software-based scrambling solution. The signaling and user identification portions of a transmission are not scrambled. 129 English Your radio must have privacy enabled on the channel to send a privacy-enabled transmission, although this is not a necessary requirement for receiving a transmission. While on a privacy-enabled channel, the radio is still able to receive clear (unscrambled) transmissions. Your radio supports two types of privacy:

Basic Privacy. Enhanced Privacy. Only one of the privacy types above can be assigned to the radio. To unscramble a privacy-enabled call or data transmission, your radio must be programmed to have the same Privacy Key (for Basic Privacy), or the same Key Value and Key ID (for Enhanced Privacy) as the transmitting radio. If your radio receives a scrambled call that is of a different Privacy Key, or a different Key Value and Key ID, you will either hear a garbled transmission

(Basic Privacy) or nothing at all (Enhanced Privacy). Note:

This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band channels that are in the same frequency. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 130 English The LED lights up solid green while the radio is transmitting and blinks green rapidly when the radio is receiving an ongoing privacy-enabled transmission. You can access this feature by performing one of the following actions:

Pressing the programmed Privacy button to toggle privacy on or off. Using the Radio Menu as described by the steps described next. Note:

Some radio models may not offer this Privacy feature. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to or to Privacy and press to select. You can also use option. or to change selected Multi-Site Controls 5 to enable/disable Privacy. beside Enabled. Press The display shows The disappears from beside Enabled. These features are applicable when your current radio channel is part of an IP Site Connect or Linked Capacity Plus configuration. See IP Site Connect on page 47 and Linked Capacity Plus on page 48 for more details about these configurations. Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) Starting an Automatic Site Search The Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) feature allows the radio to operate in a radio system with an interface to telephone systems. 1 Press and hold the PTT button to initiate a DTMF call. 2 Enter the desired number, * or #. You can turn off the DTMF tone by disabling all radio tones and alerts (see Turning the Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off on page 157). Note:

The radio only scans for a new site if the current signal is weak or when the radio is unable to detect any signal from the current site. If the RSSI value is strong, the radio remains on the current site. Steps Start Automatic Site search by Radio Controls Site Lock On/Off button Press the programmed Site Lock On/Off button to toggle the start/stop automatic site search. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 131 English Radio Controls Radio menu Steps 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press or to select. to Radio Settings and press to select. or to Site Roaming and press or to select. to Site Lock and press to select. If the current channel is a multi-site channel with an attached roam list and is out of range, the radio also performs an automatic site search (site is unlocked) during:

a PTT button press. data transmission. A tone sounds and the display shows Site Unlocked. The radio then returns to the Home screen. The display shows the Site Roaming icon and channel alias. The LED blinks yellow rapidly when the radio is actively searching for a new site, and turns off once the radio locks on to a site. Stopping an Automatic Site Search Steps When your radio is actively searching for a new site, you can stop the search by Radio Controls Site Lock On/Off button Radio menu Press the programmed Site Lock On/Off button to stop automatic site search. to access the menu. 1 e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 132 English Radio Controls Steps 2 3 4 5 or to Utilities and press or to select. to Radio Settings and press to select. or to Site Roaming and press or to select. to Site Lock and press to select. A tone sounds and the display shows Site Locked. The radio then returns to the Home screen. The LED turns off and the display shows the channel alias. Starting a Manual Site Search Start a Manual Site Search by Radio Controls Manual Site Roam button Radio menu Steps Press the programmed Manual Site Roam button to start the manual site search. A d v a n c e d F e a t 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press or to select. to Radio Settings u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t and press to select. or to Site Roaming and press or to select. to Active Search and l P u s M o d e press to select. A tone sounds, the display shows Finding Site, and the LED blinks green. 133 English If a new site is found, a tone sounds and the LED turns off. The display shows Site <Alias>

Found. If there is no available site within range, a tone sounds and the LED turns off. The display shows Out of Range. If a new site is within range, but the radio is unable to connect to it, a tone sounds and the LED turns off. The display shows Channel Busy. The radio returns to the Home screen. Security You can enable or disable any radio in the system. For example, you might want to disable a stolen radio, to prevent the thief from using it, and enable that radio, when it is recovered. Note:

Performing Radio Disable and Enable is limited to radios with these functions enabled. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 134 English Radio Disable 1 Access this feature by Radio Con-

trols Radio Disable button Radio menu Steps 1 Press the programmed Radio Disa-

ble button. 2 1 2 or to the required alias or ID and press to select. to access the menu. or to Contacts and press to select. The entries are al-

phabetically sorted. 3 Use one of the steps described next to select the required subscriber alias or ID:

Select the required alias or ID di-

rectly. Steps Radio Con-

trols Steps Radio Con-

trols or to the required 4 or to Radio Disable and alias or ID and press select. to press to select. Use the Manual Dial menu. to Manual Dial or and press to select. or to Radio Number and press to select. The first line of the display shows Radio Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to enter the sub-

scriber alias or ID and press The display shows Radio Enable: <Subscriber Alias or ID> and the LED lights up solid green. 2 Wait for acknowledgement. If successful, the radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display shows positive mini notice. If not successful, the radio sounds a negative indicator tone and the display shows negative mini notice. Do not press operation as you will not get an acknowledgement message. during the Radio Disable A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e

. Radio Enable 1 Access this feature by 135 English Steps Steps Radio Con-

trols 1 Press the programmed Radio Ena-

ble button. 2 1 2 or to the required alias or ID and press to select. to access the menu. or to Contacts and press to select. The entries are al-

phabetically sorted. 3 Use one of the steps described next to select the required subscriber alias or ID Select the required alias or ID di-

rectly. or to the required alias or ID and press select. to Use the Manual Dial menu. to Manual Dial or and press to select. or to Radio Number and press to select. The first line of the display shows Radio Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to enter the sub-

scriber alias or ID and press

. Radio Con-

trols Radio Enable button Radio menu e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 136 English Steps Radio Con-

trols 4 or to Radio Enable and press to select. The display shows Radio Enable: <Subscriber Alias or ID> and the LED lights up solid green. 2 Wait for acknowledgement. If successful, the radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display shows positive mini notice. If not successful, the radio sounds a negative indicator tone and the display shows negative mini notice. Do not press operation as you will not get an acknowledgement message. during the Radio Enable Lone Worker This feature raises an emergency if there is no user activity, such as any radio button press or activation of the channel selector, for a predefined time. Before raising the emergency, when the inactivity timer expires, the radio warns the user via an audio indicator. If there is still no acknowledgement by the user before the predefined reminder timer expires, the radio initiates an Emergency Alarm. Only one of the following Emergency Alarms can be assigned to this feature:

Emergency Alarm Emergency Alarm with Call Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow The radio remains in the emergency state allowing voice messages to proceed until action is taken. See Emergency Operation on page 103 on ways to exit Emergency. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 137 English Note:

This feature is limited to radios with this function enabled. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Password Lock Features If enabled, this feature only allows you access your radio if the correct password is entered upon powering up. Accessing the Radio from Password 1 Power up your radio. You hear a continuous tone. 2 Do one of the following: Enter your current four-

to edit each digits

. Press digit password. Press or numeric value. Each digit changes to to move to next digit. Press selection. Enter your current four-digit password with the radios keypad. The second line of the display to confirm your shows

. Press to proceed. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 138 English Enter your current four-digit password. Press to edit each digits numeric value. to move to Each digit changes to

. Press or next digit. Press to confirm your selection. on the to remove the last when the second line of the display is You hear a positive indicator tone for every digit entered. Press display. You hear a negative indicator tone, if you press empty, or if you press more than four digits. If the password is correct, your radio proceeds to power up. See Powering Up the Radio on page 27. If the password is incorrect, the display shows Wrong Password. Repeat Steps 1 and 2. After the third incorrect password, the display shows Wrong Password and then, shows Radio Locked. A tone sounds and the LED double blinks yellow. Your radio enters into locked state for 15 minutes, and responds to inputs from On/Off/Volume Control Knob and programmed Backlight button only. Note:

The radio is unable to receive any call, including emergency calls, in locked state. Unlocking the Radio from Locked State 3 4 or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Passwd Lock and press to 1 If your radio was powered down after being in the locked state, power up the radio. A tone sounds and the LED double blinks yellow. The display shows Radio Locked. 2 Wait for 15 minutes. Your radio restarts the 15 minutes timer for locked state when you power up. 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password on page 138. Turning the Password Lock On or Off 1 2 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. 5 Enter the four-digit password. See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password on page 138. 6 to proceed. Press If the password is incorrect, the display shows Wrong Password, and automatically returns to the previous menu. 7 If the password entered in the previous step is to enable/disable password correct, press lock. The display shows The beside Enabled. disappears from beside Enabled. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 139 English Changing the Password 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Passwd Lock and press to 5 Enter the four-digit password. See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password on page 138. 6 to proceed. Press If the password is incorrect, the display shows Wrong Password, and automatically returns to the previous menu. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 7 If the password entered in the previous step is correct, to select. or to Change Pwd and press 8 Enter a new four-digit password. See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password on page 138. 9 Reenter the previously entered four-digit password. See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password on page 138. 10 to proceed. Press If the reentered password matches the new password entered earlier, the display shows Password Changed. If the reentered password does NOT match the new password entered earlier, the display shows Passwords Do Not Match. The screen automatically returns to the previous menu. 140 English Bluetooth Operation Note:

If disabled via the CPS, all Bluetooth-related features are disabled and the Bluetooth device database is erased. This feature allows you to use your radio with a Bluetooth-enabled device (accessory) via a wireless Bluetooth connection. Your radio supports both Motorola and COTS (Commercially available Off-The-

Shelf) Bluetooth-enabled devices. Bluetooth operates within a range of 10 meters (32 feet) line of sight. This is an unobstructed path between your radio and your Bluetooth-enabled device. It is not recommended that you leave your radio behind and expect your Bluetooth-enabled device to work with a high degree of reliability when they are separated. At the fringe areas of reception, both voice and tone quality will start to sound garbled or broken. To correct this problem, simply position your radio and Bluetooth-enabled device closer to each other (within the 10-meter/32 feet defined range) to re-establish clear audio reception. Your radios Bluetooth function has a maximum power of 2.5 mW (4 dBm) at the 10-

meter/32 feet range. Your radio can support up to 3 simultaneous Bluetooth connections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of unique types. For example, a headset, a scanner, and a PTT-Only Device (POD). Multiple connections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of the same type are not supported. Refer to your respective Bluetooth-enabled devices user manual for more details on your Bluetooth-

enabled devices full capabilities. Turning Bluetooth On and Off A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Bluetooth and press to select. l P u s M o d e or to My Status and press to select. The display shows On and Off. The current status is indicated by a

. 4 Do one of the following:

141 English or to On and press display shows On and a selected status. to select. The appears left of the 4 or to Devices and press to select. 5 Do one of the following:

e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A or to Off and press display shows Off and a selected status. to select. The appears left of the Finding and Connecting to a Bluetooth Device Do not turn off your Bluetooth-enabled device or press operation as this cancels the operation. during the finding and connecting 6 1 Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and place it in pairing mode. Refer to respective Bluetooth-

enabled devices user manual. 2 3 On your radio, press to access the menu. or to Bluetooth and press to select. or to the required device and press to select. or devices. to Find Devices to locate available or to the required device and press to select. or to Connect and press to select. Display shows Connecting to <Device>. Your Bluetooth-enabled device may require additional steps to complete the pairing. Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled devices user manual. If successful, the radio display shows <Device>

Connected. A tone sounds and the connected device. The Bluetooth Connected icon appears on the status bar. If unsuccessful, the radio display shows Connecting Failed. appears besides 142 English Note:

If pin code is required, use the same entry method as Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password on page 138. Finding and Connecting from a Bluetooth Device

(Discoverable Mode) Do not turn off your Bluetooth or your radio during the finding and connecting operation as this may cancel the operation. 1 Turn Bluetooth On. See Turning Bluetooth On and Off on page 141. 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Bluetooth and press to select. or to Find Me and press to select. Your radio can now be found by other Bluetooth-

enabled devices for a programmed duration. This is called Discoverable Mode. 5 Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and pair it with your radio. Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled devices user manual. Disconnecting from a Bluetooth Device 1 2 3 4 5 On your radio, press to access the menu. or to Bluetooth and press to select. or to Devices and press to select. or to select. to the required device and press to Disconnect and press or select. Display shows Disconnecting from <Device>. Your Bluetooth-enabled device may require additional steps to disconnect. Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled devices user manual. to A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 143 English The radio display shows <Device> Disconnected. A positive indicator tone sounds and beside the connected device. The Bluetooth Connected icon disappears on the status bar. disappears Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speaker and Bluetooth Device You can toggle audio routing between internal radio speaker and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory. Press the programmed Bluetooth Audio Switch button. A tone sounds and display shows Route Audio to Radio. A tone sounds and display shows Route Audio to Bluetooth. Viewing Device Details 1 2 to access the menu. or to Bluetooth and press to select. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 144 English 3 4 5 or to Devices and press to select. or to select. or select. to the required device and press to View Details and press to Editing Device Name You can edit the name of available Bluetooth-enabled devices. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Bluetooth and press to select. or to Devices and press to select. or to select. to the required device and press 5 6 or to Edit Name and press to select. to move one space to the left. Press Press move one space to the right. Press any unwanted characters. Long press change text entry method. A blinking cursor appears. Use the keypad to type the required zone. to to delete to 7 The display shows Device Name Saved. Deleting Device Name You can remove a disconnected device from the list of Bluetooth-enabled devices. to access the menu. or to Bluetooth and press to select. 1 2 3 A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t 4 5 or to select. to the required device and press or to Delete and press to select. The display shows Device Deleted. Bluetooth Mic Gain Allows control of the connected Bluetooth-enabled devices microphone gain value. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Bluetooth and press to select. or select. or values. to BT Mic Gain and press to to the BT Mic Gain type and the current l P u s M o d e or to Devices and press to select. To edit values, press to select. 145 English 5 or to increase or to decrease values and press to select. Permanent Bluetooth Discoverable Mode Note:

The Permanent Bluetooth Discoverable Mode can only be enabled via the MOTOTRBO CPS. If enabled, the Bluetooth item will not be displayed in the Menu and you will not be able to use any Bluetooth programmable button features. Other Bluetooth-enabled devices can locate your radio, but the devices cannot connect to the radio. It enables dedicated devices to use your radio position in the process of Bluetooth-based location. Notification List Your radio has a Notification List that collects all your unread events on the channel, such as unread text messages, telemetry messages and missed calls. Unread Job Tickets are also stored in the notification list. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 146 English The Notification icon appears on the status bar when the Notification List has one or more events. For TMS and missed call/call alert notification events, the maximum number are 30 TMS and 10 missed calls/call alerts. This maximum number depends on individual feature (job tickets or TMS or missed calls/

call alerts) list capability. Note:

After the events are read, they are removed from the Notification List. Accessing the Notification List 1 2 3 to access the menu. or select. or select. to Notification and press to to the required event and press to Long press to return to the Home Screen. Auto-Range Transponder System (ARTS) ARTS is an analog-only feature designed to inform you when your radio is out-of-range of other ARTS-

equipped radios. ARTS-equipped radios transmit or receive signals periodically to confirm that they are within range of each other. Your dealer can program your radio to transmit or receive the ARTS signal. Your radio provides indications of states as follows:

First-Time Alert A tone sounds and the display shows In Range after the channel alias. ARTS-in-Range Alert A tone sounds, if programmed, and the display shows In Range after the channel alias. ARTS-Out-of-Range Alert A tone sounds, the LED rapidly blinks red, and the display alternates between Out of Range and the home screen. Over-the-Air-Programming (OTAP) Your radio can be updated by your dealer remotely, via OTAP, without needing to be physically connected. Additionally, some settings can also be configured via OTAP. While undergoing OTAP, the LED blinks green. Note:

When the radio is receiving high volume data, the High Volume Data icon appears and channel is busy. A PTT button press at this time may cause a negative tone to sound. Once the programming is complete, depending on your radios configuration:

A tone sounds, the display shows Updating Restarting, and your radio restarts (powers off and on again). Select between Restart Now or Postpone. Selecting Postpone allows your radio to return to the previous display, with an OTAP Timer icon visible, for a period of time before the automatic restart occurs. Upon power up after the automatic restart occurs, the display shows Sw Update Completed if the OTAP update is successful or Sw Update Failed if the OTAP update is unsuccessful. See Software Update on page 184 for your updated software version. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 147 English Wi-Fi Operation Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance. Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e only. This feature allows you to setup and connect to a Wi-

Fi network. Wi-Fi supports updates for radio firmware, codeplug, and resources such as language packs and voice announcement. Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e only. The programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button is assigned via CPS. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. You can turn on or turn off Wi-Fi by performing one of the following actions. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 148 English Press the programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button. Voice Announcement sounds Turning On Wi-Fi or Turning Off Wi-Fi. Access this feature via the menu. a) Press to access the menu. b) Press select. c) Press or or to select. to WiFi and press to to WiFi Status and press Press to turn on Wi-Fi. The display shows beside Enabled. Press from beside Enabled. to turn off Wi-Fi. The disappears Connecting to a Network Access Point Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e only. When you turn on Wi-Fi, the radio scans and connects to a network access point. You can also connect to a network access point via the menu. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press or to WiFi and press to select. Press select. or to Networks and press to 4 Press or to a network access point and press to select. 5 6 Press select. or to Connect and press to Enter the password and press

. When the connection is successful, the radio displays a notice and the network access point is saved into the profile list. Refreshing the Network List Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e only. Perform the following actions to refresh the network list. a) Press to access the menu. b) c) Press select. or to WiFi and press to or to Networks and press Press to select. When you enter the Networks menu, the radio automatically refreshes the network list. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e If you are already in the Networks menu, perform the following action to refresh the network list. 149 English a) Press select. or to Refresh and press to The radio refreshes and displays the latest network list. Adding a Network Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e only. If a preferred network is not in the available network list, perform the following actions to add a network. 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press or to WiFi and press to select. Press select. Press to select. or to Networks and press to or to Add Network and press e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 150 English 5 Enter the Service Set Identifier (SSID) and press

. 6 7 Press or to Open and press to select. Enter the password and press

. The radio displays network is successfully saved. to indicate that the Viewing Details of Network Access Points Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e only. Perform the following actions to view details of network access points. 1 2 Press to access the menu. Press or to WiFi and press to select. 3 Press select. or to Networks and press to Perform the following actions to remove network access points from the profile list. 4 Press or to a network access point and press to select. 5 or to View Details and press Press to select. For a connected network access point, the Service Set Identifier (SSID), Security Mode, Media Access Control (MAC) address, and Internet Protocol (IP) address are displayed. For a non-connected network access point, the Service Set Identifier (SSID) and Security Mode are displayed. Removing Network Access Points Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e only. Enterprise network access points that are added via CPS can only be removed via CPS. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press or to WiFi and press to select. Press select. or to Networks and press to 4 Press or to the selected network access point and press to select. 5 6 Press select. or to Remove and press to Press or to Yes and press to select. The radio displays selected network access point is successfully removed. to indicate that the A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 151 English Utilities Locking and Unlocking the Keypad You can lock your radios keypad to avoid inadvertent key entry. Steps To lock/unlock your radios keypad. Option Locking the Key-

pad 1 2 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press or to select. to Radio Settings and press to select. or to Keypad Lock and 3 4 to select. press You can also use or to change the selected option. Option Unlocking the Key-

pad Steps Press followed by

. After the keypad is locked, the display shows Keypad Locked and returns to the Home screen. After the keypad is unlocked, the display shows Keypad Unlocked and returns to the Home screen. Turning Keypad Tones On or Off You can enable and disable keypad tones if needed. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 152 English 4 5 6 or select. or select. to Tones/Alerts and press to to Keypad Tones and press to You can also use option. or to change the selected to enable/disable keypad tones. beside Enabled. Press The display shows The disappears from beside Enabled. Setting the Squelch Level You can adjust your radio's squelch level to filter out unwanted calls with low signal strength or channels that have a higher than normal background noise. Normal is the default. Tight filters out (unwanted) calls and/or background noise; however, calls from remote locations may also be filtered out. Note:

This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band channels that are in the same frequency. Press the programmed Squelch button to toggle squelch level between normal and tight. Follow the procedure described next to access this feature via the radios menus. to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to or to Squelch and press to select. 1 2 3 4 5 A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e or to the required setting and press to select. appears besides selected setting. Screen returns to the previous menu. 153 English Setting the Power Level Note:

This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band channels that are in the same frequency. You can customize the power setting of the radio to high or low for each channel. High enables communication with radios located at a considerable distance from you. Low enables communication with radios in closer proximity. Press the programmed Power Level button to toggle transmit power level between high and low. Follow the procedure described next to access this feature via the radio menu. 1 2 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities and press to 4 Press select. or to Power and press to 5 Press or to the required setting and press to select. appears beside selected setting. At any time, long press Screen returns to the previous menu. to return to the Home screen. Turning the Option Board Feature(s) On or Off A channel can support up to 6 option board features. Refer to your dealer or system administrator for more information. Press the programmed Option Board Feature button to toggle the feature on or off. Identifying Cable Type 3 Press or to Radio Settings and press You can select the type of cable your radio uses. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 1 to access the menu. to select. 154 English 2 3 4 or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Cable Type and press to You can also use option. or to change the selected 5 The current cable type is indicated by a

. Turning the Voice Operating Transmission (VOX) Feature On or Off This feature allows you to initiate a hands-free voice activated call on a programmed channel. The radio automatically transmits, for a programmed period, whenever the microphone on the VOX-capable accessory detects voice. Note:

This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band channels that are in the same frequency. Pressing the PTT button during radio operation will disable VOX. To re-enable VOX, do one of the following:

Turn the radio off and power it on again. Change the channel via the Channel Selector Press the programmed VOX button to toggle the Knob. feature on or off. Follow the steps described next to access this feature via the radio menu. If the Talk Permit Tone feature is enabled (see Turning the Talk Permit Tone On or Off on page 158), use a trigger word to initiate the call. Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish before speaking clearly into the microphone. Note:

Turning this feature on or off is limited to radios with this function enabled. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 1 to access the menu. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 155 English 2 3 4 5 or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to or to VOX and press to select. You can also use option. or to change the selected to disable/enable VOX. beside Enabled. Press The display shows The disappears from beside Enabled. Setting the Display Backlight Timer You can set the the radios display backlight timer as needed. The setting also affects the Menu Navigation Buttons and keypad backlighting accordingly. Press the programmed Backlight button to toggle the backlight settings, or follow the procedure described next to access this feature via the radio menu. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 156 English The display backlight and keypad backlighting are automatically turned off if the LED indicator is disabled (see Turning the LED Indicator On or Off on page 162). 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to or to Display and press to select. or select. to Backlight Timer and press to You can use option. or to change the selected Turning the Backlight Auto On or Off Turning the Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off You can enable and disable the radios backlight to turn on automatically if needed. If enabled, the backlight is turned on when the radio receives a call, Notification List event, or Emergency Alarm. 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to or to Backlight Auto. Press to enable/disable the Backlight Auto. The display shows The disappears from beside Enabled. beside Enabled. You can enable and disable all radio tones and alerts

(except for the incoming Emergency alert tone) if needed. Press the programmed All Tones/Alerts button to toggle all tones on or off, or follow the procedure described next to access this feature via the radio menu. 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Tones/Alerts and press to or to All Tones and press to select. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 157 English to enable/disable all tones and alerts. Press The display shows The beside Enabled. disappears from beside Enabled. Setting the Tone Alert Volume Offset Level You can adjust the Tone Alert Volume Offset level if needed. This feature adjusts the volume of the tones/

alerts, allowing it to be higher or lower than the voice volume. to access the menu. 5 6 or select. to Vol. Offset and press to or to the required volume value. The radio sounds a feedback tone with each corresponding volume value. 7 Do one of the following:

Press volume value. to keep the required displayed Press volume offset settings. to exit without changing the current or to Utilities and press to select. Turning the Talk Permit Tone On or Off or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to You can enable and disable the Talk Permit Tone if needed. to Tones/Alerts and press to 1 2 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. 6 1 2 3 4 e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 158 English 3 4 5 6 or select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Tones/Alerts and press to to Talk Permit and press to You can also use option. or to change the selected to enable/disable the Talk Permit Press Tone. The display shows The beside Enabled. disappears from beside Enabled. Turning the Power Up Alert Tone On or Off You can enable and disable the Power Up Alert Tone if needed. 1 2 3 4 5 6 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Tones/Alerts and press to or to Power Up and press to select. You can also use option. or to change the selected A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e to enable/disable the Power Up Alert Press Tone. The display shows The beside Enabled. disappears from beside Enabled. 159 English Setting the Text Message Alert Tone appears besides selected setting. You can customize your radios text message alert tone to Momentary or Repetitive for each entry in the Contacts list. Changing the Display Mode You can change radios display mode between Day or Night, as needed. This affects the color palette of the display. to access the menu. or or to Contacts and press to select. to the required subscriber alias or ID and press to select. to Message Alert and press or select. The display shows Momentary and Repetitive. to Press the programmed Display Mode button. Steps Change the Display Mode:

Radio Control Pro-

gram-

med Display Mode Button Menu 1 You can also use option. or to change the selected or enable. to the required setting and press to 2 3 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or to Radio Settings and press to select. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 1 2 3 4 5 160 English Radio Control Steps 4 5 or to Display and press to select. The display shows Day Mode and Night Mode. Note:

You can also use to change the selected option. or or to the required setting and press ap-

pears besides selected setting. to enable. Adjusting the Display Brightness You can adjust the display brightness of the radio as needed. Note:

Display brightness cannot be adjusted when Auto Brightness is enabled. Steps Adjust the Display Brightness by performing one of the following actions:

Radio Control Program-

med Dis-

play Bright-

ness Button 2 Decrease display brightness by 1 Press the programmed Bright-

pressing brightness by pressing or increase the display ness button. Select Menu 1 2 3 from setting of 1 to 8. Press to confirm your entry. to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or to Radio Settings and press to select. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 161 English Radio Control Steps 4 or to Brightness and to select. press The display shows a progress bar. 5 Decrease display brightness by or increase the display pressing brightness by pressing

. Select from setting of 1 to 8. Press to confirm your entry. Language You can set your radio display to be in your required language. to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 1 2 162 English 3 4 5 or select. to Radio Settings and press to or to Languages and press to select. You can also use option. or to change selected or to the required language and press to enable. language. appears beside selected Turning the LED Indicator On or Off You can enable and disable the LED Indicator if needed. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. 3 4 5 or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to LED Indicator and press to You can also use option. or to change the selected to enable/disable the LED Indicator. Press The display shows The beside Enabled. disappears from beside Enabled. Turning the Introduction Screen On or Off You can enable and disable the Introduction Screen if needed. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. 3 4 5 6 or select. to Radio Settings and press to or to Display and press to select. or select. to Intro Screen and press to You can also use option. or to change the selected to enable/disable the Introduction Press Screen. The display shows The beside Enabled. disappears from beside Enabled. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e Turning the Voice Announcement On or Off Note:

The Voice Announcement feature can only be enabled via the MOTOTRBO CPS. If enabled, the Text-to-Speech feature is automatically disabled, and vice versa. 163 English This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the current Zone or Channel the user has assigned, or programmable button press. This audio indicator can be customized per customer requirements. This is typically useful when the user is in a difficult condition to read the content shown on the display. Press the programmed Voice An-

nouncement button. Steps Toggle Voice Announcement On or Off. Radio Control Program-

med Voice An-

nounce-

ment But-

ton Menu 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press or to select. to Radio Settings and press to select. Radio Control Steps 4 or to Voice Announce ment and press to select. Note:

You can also use or to change the selected option. 5 Do one of the following:

Press to enable Voice Announcement. The display shows beside Enabled. to disable Voice Press Announcement. The pears from beside Enabled. disap-

Setting the Text-to-Speech Feature Note:

The Text-to-Speech feature can only be enabled via the MOTOTRBO Customer e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 164 English Programming Software. If enabled, the Voice Announcement feature is automatically disabled, and vice versa. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the following features:

Current Channel Current Zone Programmed button feature on or off Content of received text messages Content of received Job Tickets This audio indicator can be customized per customer requirements. This is typically useful when the user is in a difficult condition to read the content shown on the display. 1 2 to access the menu. 3 4 5 or select. to Radio Settings and press to or to Voice Announcement and press to select. or to any of the following features and to change the selected press to select. or You can also use option. All Messages Job Tickets Channel Zone Program Button or to Utilities and press to select. appears beside the selected setting. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 165 English Call Forwarding Menu Timer You can enable your radio to automatically forward voice calls to another radio. Set the period of time your radio stays in the menu before it automatically switches to the Home screen. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Call Forward and press to You can also use option. or to change the selected 4 Do one of the following:

Press display shows to enable Call Forwarding. The beside Enabled. Press disappears from beside Enabled. to disable Call Forwarding. The 1 2 3 4 5 6 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to or to Display and press to select. or select. or to select. to Menu Timer and press to to the required setting and press 166 English Analog Mic AGC (Mic AGC-A) This feature controls the your radio's microphone gain automatically while transmitting on an analog system. It suppresses loud audio or boosts soft audio to a preset value in order to provide a consistent level of audio. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to You can also use option. or to change the selected or to Mic AGC-A and press to select. 5 Do one of the following:

Press shows to enable Mic AGC-A. The display beside Enabled. Press disappears from beside Enabled. to disable Mic AGC-A. The Digital Mic AGC (Mic AGC-D) This feature controls the your radio's microphone gain automatically while transmitting on a digital system. It suppresses loud audio or boosts soft audio to a preset value in order to provide a consistent level of audio. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to You can also use option. or to change the selected or to Mic AGC-D and press to select. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 167 English 5 Do one of the following:

Intelligent Audio Press shows to enable Mic AGC-D. The display beside Enabled. Press disappears from beside Enabled. to disable Mic AGC-D. The Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speaker and Wired Accessory You can toggle audio routing between the internal radio speaker and the speaker of wired accessory provided that:

The wired accessory with speaker is attached. The audio is not routed to an external Bluetooth-

enabled accessory. Powering down the radio or detaching the accessory resets the audio routing to the internal radio speaker. Press the programmed Audio Toggle button to toggle audio routing between the internal radio speaker and the speaker of wired accessory. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 168 English Your radio can automatically adjust its audio volume to overcome background noise in the environment, inclusive of all stationary and non-stationary noise sources. This feature is a Receive-only feature and does not affect Transmit audio. Note:

This feature is not applicable during a Bluetooth session. Press the programmed Intelligent Au-

dio button. Steps Toggle Intelligent Audio On or Off. Radio Control Pro-

gram-

med In-

telligent Audio Button Menu 1 to access the menu. Radio Control Steps 2 3 4 or to Radio Settings and press or press or to select. to Radio Settings and to select. to Intelligent Audio and press to select. Note:

You can also use to change the selected option. or 5 Do one of the following:

Press Audio. The display shows side Enabled. to enable Intelligent be-

Radio Control Steps Press Audio. The beside Enabled. to disable Intelligent disappears from See Authorized Accessories List on page 307 for recommended Bluetooth-enabled audio accessories with in-built Automatic Volume Control for similar performance. Turning the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Feature On or Off This feature allows you to minimize acoustic feedback in received calls. Toggle the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Feature On or Off by performing one of the following actions:

Steps Radio Control Program-

med Press the programmed Acoustic Feedback Suppressor button. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 169 English Steps Radio Control Steps 5 Do one of the following:

1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press or to select. to Radio Settings to enable Acoustic Press Feedback Suppressor. The display shows bled. beside Ena-

to disable Acoustic Press Feedback Suppressor. The disappears from beside Ena-

bled. and press to select. or to AF Suppressor and Turning the Microphone Dynamic Distortion Control Feature On or Off press to select. Note:

You can also use to change the selected op-

tion. or This feature allows you to enable the radio to automatically monitor the microphone input and adjust the microphone gain value to avoid audio clipping. 1 to access the menu. Radio Control Acoustic Feedback Suppres-

sor But-

ton Menu e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 170 English 2 3 4 or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to You can also use option. or to change the selected or select. to Mic Distortion and press to 5 Do one of the following:

to enable Microphone Dynamic Press Distortion Control. The display shows Enabled. beside Press Distortion Control. The beside Enabled. to disable Microphone Dynamic disappears from A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t Setting the Audio Ambience You can customize the audio ambience of the radio according to your environment. Default enables the default factory settings. Loud enables Noise Suppressor and increases speaker loudness for use in noisy surroundings. Work Group enables AF Suppressor and disables AGC for use when a group of radios are near to each other. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Audio Ambience and press to l P u s M o d e 171 English 5 or to select. to the required setting and press You can also use option. or to change the selected appears beside the selected setting. Screen returns to the previous menu. Setting the Audio Profiles You can customize the audio profiles of the radio according to your preference. Default disables the previously selected audio profile and the radios audio profile returns to normal. Level 1, Level 2, and Level 3 are audio profiles intended to compensate for noise-induced hearing loss that is typical for adults in their 40s, 50s, and 60s or over. Treble Boost, Mid Boost, and Bass Boost are for a tinnier sound, a more nasal sound, and a deeper sound. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 1 172 English to access the menu. 2 3 4 5 or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. or to select. to Radio Settings and press to to Audio Profiles and press to to the required setting and press You can also use option. or to change the selected appears beside the selected setting. Screen returns to the previous menu. Turning GPS/GNSS On or Off Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) is a satellite navigation system that determines the radios precise location. GNSS includes Global Positioning System (GPS), Global Navigation Satellite System

(GLONASS), and BeiDou Navigation Satellite System

(BDS). Press the programmed GPS/GNSS button to toggle the feature on or off. 5 Note:

Selected radio models may offer GPS, GLONASS, and BDS. GNSS constellation is configured via CPS. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. 1 2 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities and press to 3 Press or to Radio Settings and press to select. 4 Press or to GPS and press to select. to enable/disable GPS/GNSS. beside Enabled. Press The display shows The disappears from beside Enabled. See Checking the GPS/GNSS Information on page 184 for details on retrieving GPS/GNSS information. Text Entry Configuration You can configure the following settings for entering text on your radio:

Word Predict Word Correct Sentence Cap My Words Your radio supports the following text entry methods:

Numbers Symbols Predictive or Multi-Tap Language (If programmed) A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 173 English Note:

Press at any time to return to the previous screen or long press to return to the Home Screen. The radio exits the current screen once the inactivity timer expires. Word Predict Your radio can learn common word sequences that you often enter. It then predicts the next word you may want to use after you enter the first word of a common word sequence into the text editor. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Text Entry and press to e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 174 English 5 or select. to Word Predict and press to You can also use option. or to change the selected 6 Do one of the following:

Press shows to enable Word Predict. The display beside Enabled. Press disappears from beside Enabled. to disable Word Predict. The Sentence Cap Automatically enables capitalization for the first letter in the first word for every new sentence. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. 3 4 5 or select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Text Entry and press to to Sentence Cap and press to 6 Do one of the following:

Press display shows to enable Sentence Cap. The beside Enabled. Press disappears from beside Enabled. to disable Sentence Cap. The Viewing Custom Words You can add your own custom words into your radios in-built dictionary. Your radio maintains a list to contain these words. 1 2 3 4 5 6 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Text Entry and press to or to My Words and press to select. to List of Words and press or select. Display shows the list of custom words. to Editing Custom Word You can edit the custom words saved in your radio. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 1 to access the menu. 175 English 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Text Entry and press to or to My Words and press to select. to List of Words and press or select. Display shows the list of custom words. to or select. to the required word and press to or to Edit and press to select. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 9 Use the keypad to edit your custom word. 176 English to move one space to the left. Press key to move one space to the right. key to delete any unwanted Press the Press the characters. Long press to change text entry or method. Press completed. once your custom word is The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your custom word is being saved. If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the custom word is not saved, a low tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. Adding Custom Word You can add your own custom words into your radios in-built dictionary. 1 to access the menu. 2 3 4 5 6 or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Text Entry and press to or to My Words and press to select. method. Press completed. once your custom word is The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your custom word is being saved. If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the custom word is not saved, a low tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. Deleting a Custom Word You can delete the custom words saved in your radio. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t to Add New Word and press or select. Display shows the list of custom words. to 7 Use the keypad to edit your custom word. to move one space to the left. Press key to move one space to the right. key to delete any unwanted Press the Press the characters. Long press to change text entry 1 2 3 or to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to l P u s M o d e 177 English 4 5 6 7 or select. to Text Entry and press to or to My Words and press to select. or select. to the required word and press to or to Delete and press to select. 8 Choose one of the following. At Delete Entry?, press The display shows Entry Deleted. to select Yes. or to No and press previous screen. to return to the Deleting All Custom Words You can delete all custom words from your radios in-

built. 1 2 3 4 5 6 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Text Entry and press to or to My Words and press to select. or select. to Delete All and press to 7 Choose one of the following. At Delete Entry?, press The display shows Entry Deleted. to select Yes. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 178 English or to No and press previous screen. Flexible Receive List to return to the Radio Con-

trol Menu Flexible Receive List is a digital-only (currently supported in Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity Plus) feature that allows you to add, delete or edit members on the receive talkgroup list. Your radio can support a maximum of 16 members in the list. Turning the Flexible Receive List On or Off You can enable and disable the Flexible Receive List if needed. Steps Enable the Flexible Receive List by performing one of the following actions:

Radio Con-

trol Programmed Flexible Re-

ceive List Button Press the programmed Flexible Receive List button. Steps 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Flexible Rx List and press to select. to enable or disable Press the Flexible Receive List fea-

ture. Previous display Current display Turn On Flexible Rx List On Turn Off Flexible Rx List Off Adding a New Entry to the Flexible Receive List 1 to access the menu. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 179 English 2 3 4 5 6 or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or to select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Flexible Rx List and press to View/Edit List and press to to Add Member and press to 7 Select the required alias or ID by performing one Steps of the following actions:

Radio Control Radio Naviga-

or to the required alias or ID. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 180 English Steps Radio Control tion But-

tons Keypad Key in the first character of the re-

quired alias. A blinking cursor appears. to move one space to the left. to move one space to the key to delete Press Press right. Press the any unwanted characters. Long press to change the text entry method. The first line of the display shows the characters you keyed in. The next lines of the display show the short list-

ed search results. The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more aliases with the same name, the radio displays the alias that is listed first in the list. 8 9 Press The display shows Add Another?. to select. or to No and press The display shows

. to select Deleting an Entry from the Flexible Receive List 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Flexible Rx List and press to View/Edit List and press to 6 Select the required alias or ID by performing one Steps of the following actions:

Radio Control Radio Naviga-

tion But-

tons Keypad Key in the first character of the re-

or to the required alias or ID. quired alias. A blinking cursor appears. to move one space to the left. to move one space to the key to delete Press Press right. Press the any unwanted characters. Long press to change the text entry method. The first line of the display shows the characters you keyed in. The next lines of the display show the short list-

ed search results. The alias search is A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 181 English Radio Control Steps case-insensitive. If there are two or more aliases with the same name, the radio displays the alias that is listed first in the list. Press to select. or to Delete and press to select. or to Yes and press The display shows

. to select. 7 8 9 Accessing General Radio Information Your radio contains information on the following:

Battery Radio Alias and ID Firmware and Codeplug Versions GPS Information Software Update e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 182 English Site Information Press at any time to return to the previous to return to the Home screen or long press screen. The radio exits the current screen once the inactivity timer expires. Accessing the Battery Information Displays information on your radio battery. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Info and press to to Battery Info and press or select. The display shows the battery information. to For IMPRES batteries ONLY: The display reads Recondition Battery if the battery requires reconditioning in an IMPRES charger. After the reconditioning process, the display then shows the battery information. Checking the Radio Alias and ID This feature displays the ID of your radio. Press the programmed Radio Alias and ID button to check your radio alias and ID. You hear a positive indicator tone. Follow the procedure described next to access this feature via the radio screen. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Info and press to or to My ID and press to select. The first line of the display shows the radio alias. The second line of the display shows the radio ID. You can also press the programmed Radio Alias and ID button to return to the previous screen. Checking the Firmware Version and Codeplug Version Displays the firmware version on your radio. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Info and press to or to Versions and press to select. The display shows the current firmware and codeplug versions. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 183 English Checking the GPS/GNSS Information Displays the GPS/GNSS information on your radio, such as values of:

Latitude Longitude Altitude Direction Velocity Horizontal Dilution of Precision (HDOP) Satellites Version 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Info and press to or to GPS Info and press to select. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 184 English 5 to the required item and press or select. The display shows the requested GPS/GNSS information. to See Turning GPS/GNSS On or Off on page 172 for details on GPS/GNSS. Software Update Displays the date and time of the latest software update carried out via Over-the-Air Programming. Note:

Software Update menu is only available after at least one successful OTAP session. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Info and press to 4 or to SW Update and press to select. The display shows the date and time of the latest software update. See Over-the-Air-Programming (OTAP) on page 147 for details on OTAP session. Site Information Displays the current Linked Capacity Plus site name your radio is on. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Info and press to or to Site Info and press to select. The display shows the current Linked Capacity Plus site name. See Linked Capacity Plus on page 48 for details on Linked Capacity Plus. Front Panel Configuration (FPC) Your radio is able to customize certain feature parameters to enhance the use of your radio. Entering FPC Mode 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Program Radio and press to Long press screen. at any time to return to the Home Editing FPC Mode Parameters Use the following buttons as required while navigating through the feature parameters:

A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 185 English

, Scroll through options, increase/

decrease values, or navigate vertically. Select the option or enter a sub-menu. Short-press to return to previous menu or to exit the selection screen. Long-press to return to Home screen. Checking the RSSI Values Your radio shows the Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) icon at the top of your display. This feature allows you to view the RSSI values. On the home screen, press immediately press The display shows current RSSI values. Long

, all within 5 seconds. three times and press the to return to the Home Screen. See Display Icons on page 39 for details on RSSI icon. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 186 English Connect Plus Operations C o n n e c t l P u s O p e r a t i o n s 187 English Additional Radio Controls in Connect Plus Mode Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button While a call is not in progress, the PTT button is used to make a new call (see Making a Radio Call on page 203). If the Talk Permit Tone (see Turning the Talk Permit Tone On or Off on page 158) is enabled, wait until the short alert tone ends before talking. The PTT button on the side of the radio (

two basic purposes:

) serves Programmable Buttons e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n l i s o r t n o C o d a R i l a n o i t i d d A 188 Your dealer can program the programmable buttons as shortcuts to radio functions depending on the duration of a button press:

Short press Long press Pressing and releasing rapidly. Pressing and holding for the programmed duration. Press and hold Keeping the button pressed. Note:

The programmed duration of a button press is applicable for all assignable radio/utility functions or settings. See Emergency Operation on page 232 for more information on the programmed duration of the Emergency button. While a call is in progress, the PTT button allows the radio to transmit to other radios in the call. Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. The microphone is activated when the PTT button is pressed. English A Assignable Radio Functions Beacon On/Off Beacon Reset Bluetooth Audio Switch Busy Queue Cancellation Call Log Contacts Toggles the Beacon feature on or off. Requires purchase of Connect Plus Man Down feature. Resets (cancels) the Beacon tone, but it does not turn the Beacon feature off. Requires purchase of Connect Plus Man Down feature. Toggles audio routing between internal radio speaker and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory. Exits the busy mode when a non-Emergency call in the Busy Queue was initiated. Emergency calls, once accepted into the Busy Queue, cannot be cancelled. Selects the call log list. Provides direct access to the Contacts list. Emergency On/Off Depending on the Intelligent Audio Man Down Alarms On/Off Man Down Alarms Reset Manual Dial One Touch Access programming, initiates or cancels an emergency. Toggles intelligent audio on or off. Toggles all configured Man Down Alarms on or off. Requires purchase of Connect Plus Man Down feature. If pressed while a Man Down feature Alert Tone is playing, the tone is cancelled and feature timers are reset, but it does not turn the Man Down Alarms off. Requires purchase of Man Down feature. Depending on the programming, initiates a Private or Phone Call by keying in any subscriber ID or phone number. Directly initiates a predefined Private Call, a Call Alert or a Quick Text message. A d d i t i o n a l i R a d o C o n t r o s i l n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 189 English Privacy Radio Check Radio Enable Radio Disable Remote Monitor Roam Request e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n l i s o r t n o C o d a R i Text Message l a n o i t i d d A 190 English Toggles privacy on or off. Determines if a radio is active in a system. Allows a target radio to be remotely enabled. Allows a target radio to be remotely disabled. Turns on the microphone of a target radio without it giving any indicators. Requests to search for a different site. Toggles scan on or off. searches the current site only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites in addition to the current site. Selects the text message menu. Voice Announcement for Channel Voice Announcement On/Off Zone Plays zone and channel announcement voice messages for the current channel. This function is unavailable when Voice Announcement is disabled. Toggles voice announcement on or off. Allows selection from a list of zones. Assignable Settings or Utility Functions AF Suppressor All Tones/Alerts Backlight Backlight Brightness Display Mode Toggles the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor feature on or off. Toggles all tones and alerts on or off. Toggles display backlight on or off. Adjusts the brightness level. Toggles the day/night display mode on or off. Scan Site Lock On/Off When toggled on, the radio Global Positioning System (GPS) Keypad Lock Power Level Unassigned Toggles the satellite navigation system on or off. Toggles keypad between locked and unlocked. Toggles transmit power level between high and low. Indicates that the button function has not yet been assigned. Identifying Status Indicators in Connect Plus Mode Display Icons The 132 x 90 pixels, 256 colors, liquid crystal display

(LCD) of your radio shows radio status, text entries, and menu entries. The following are icons that appear on the display of the radio. Icons are displayed on the status bar, arranged left-most in order of appearance/usage and are channel specific. Received Signal Strength Indicator

(RSSI) The number of bars displayed repre-

sents the radio signal strength. Four bars indicate the strongest signal. This icon is only displayed while receiving. Bluetooth The Bluetooth feature is enabled but there is no remote Bluetooth device con-

nected. Bluetooth Connected The Bluetooth feature is enabled. The icon stays lit when a remote Bluetooth device is connected. Notification List has items to review. or Power Level Radio is set at Low power or Radio is set at High power. A d d i t i o n a l i R a d o C o n t r o s i l n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 191 English Tones Disable Tones are turned off. Option Board The Option Board is enabled. Option Board Non-Function The Option Board is disabled. GPS/GNSS Available The GPS/GNSS feature is enabled. The icon stays lit when a position fix is avail-

able. GPS/GNSS Not Available/Out of Range The GPS/GNSS feature is enabled but is not receiving data from the satellite. Scan Scan feature is enabled. Emergency Radio is in Emergency mode. Secure The Privacy feature is enabled. Unsecure The Privacy feature is disabled. Site Roaming The site roaming feature is enabled. Battery The number of bars (0 4) shown indi-

cates the charge remaining in the bat-

tery. Blinks when the battery is low. Wi-Fi Excellent[6]

Wi-Fi signal is excellent. Wi-Fi Good[6]

Wi-Fi signal is good. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n l i s o r t n o C o d a R i l a n o i t i d d A 192 English Wi-Fi Average[6]

Wi-Fi signal is average. Wi-Fi Poor[6]

Wi-Fi signal is poor. Wi-Fi Unavailable[6]

Wi-Fi signal is unavailable. Call Icons The following icons appear on the radios display during a call. These icons also appear in the Contacts list to indicate ID type. Group Call/Site All Call Indicates a Group Call or Site All Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indi-

cates a group alias (name) or ID

(number). Phone Call as Private Call Indicates a Phone Call as Private Call in progress. Dispatch Call The Dispatch Call contact type is used to send a text message to a dispatch-

er PC through a third-party Text Mes-

sage Server. Private Call Indicates a Private Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a sub-

scriber alias (name) or ID (number). Advanced Menu Icons The following icons appear beside menu items that offer a choice between two options or as an indication that there is a sub-menu offering two options. A d d i t i o n a l i R a d o C o n t r o s i l n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 6 Only applicable for XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e 193 English Checkbox (Empty) Indicates the option is not selected. Checkbox (Checked) Indicates the option is selected. Solid Black Box Indicates the option selected for the menu item with a sub-menu. Sent Item Icons The following icons appear at the top right corner of the radios display in the Sent Items folder. Sent Successfully The text message is sent successfully. OR e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n l i s o r t n o C o d a R i l a n o i t i d d A 194 English OR In-Progress The text message to a group alias or ID is pending transmission. The text message to a subscriber alias or ID is pending transmission, followed by waiting for acknowledgement. Bluetooth Device Icons The following icons also appear next to items in the list of Bluetooth-enabled devices available to indicate the device type. Bluetooth Data Device Bluetooth-enabled data device, such as a scanner. Bluetooth Audio Device Bluetooth-enabled audio device, such as a headset. Bluetooth PTT Device Bluetooth-enabled PTT device, such as a PTT-Only Device (POD). LED Indicator The LED indicator (

your radio.

) shows the operational status of Rapidly blinking red Blinking red Battery mismatch occurs or radio is transmitting at low battery condition, receiving an emergency transmis-

sion or has failed the self-test upon powering up, or has moved out of A d d i t i o n a l i R a d o C o n t r o s i l n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e range if radio is configured with Au-

to-Range Transponder System. Radio is receiving over-the-air file transfer (Option Board firmware file, Network Frequency file or Option Board Codeplug file) or upgrading to a new Option Board firmware file. Radio is receiving a Call Alert, re-

ceived a text message or Scan is en-

abled and is receiving activity. Blinking green and yellow Solid yellow Radio is in Bluetooth Discoverable Mode. Radio is actively searching for a new site. Double blinking yel-

low Blinking yel-

low Radio is receiving a Call Alert or Scan is enabled and is idle (radio will remain muted to any activity). Solid green Radio is powering up or transmitting. Blinking green Radio is powering up, receiving a non-privacy- enabled call or data. 195 English A Double blinking green Indicator Tones Radio is receiving a privacy-enabled call. Repetitive Tone Momentary Tone High pitched tone Low pitched tone A single tone that re-

peats itself until it is ter-

minated by the user. Sounds only once for a short period of time de-

fined by the radio. Switching Between Connect Plus and Non-

Connect Plus Modes To switch to a non-Connect Plus mode, you must change to another zone, if programmed by your dealer or system administrator. Check with your dealer or system administrator to see if your radio has been programmed with non-Connect Plus zones, and what features are available while operating in non-

Connect Plus zones. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n l i s o r t n o C o d a R i l a n o i t i d d A 196 English Positive Indicator Tone Negative Indicator Tone Alert Tones Alert tones provide you with audible indications of the status, or response to data received on the radio. Continuous Tone Periodic Tone A monotone sound. Sounds continuously un-

til termination. Sounds periodically de-

pending on the duration set by the radio. Tone starts, stops, and repeats itself. Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode Press the programmed Roam Request button. You hear a tone, indicating the radio has switched to a new site. The display shows Site ID <Site Number>. Selecting a Site Site Lock On/Off A site provides coverage for a specific area. A Connect Plus site has a site controller and a maximum of 15 repeaters. In a multi-site network, the Connect Plus radio will automatically search for a new site when the signal level from the current site drops to an unacceptable level. Roam Request A Roam Request tells the radio to search for a different site, even if the signal from the current site is acceptable. If there are no sites available, The radio display shows Searching and continues to search through the list of sites. The radio will return to the previous site, if the previous site is still available. Note:

This is programmed by your dealer. When toggled on, the radio searches the current site only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites in addition to the current site. Press the programmed Site Lock button. You hear a positive indicator tone, indicating the radio has locked to the current site. The display shows Site Locked. You hear a negative indicator tone, indicating the radio is unlocked. The display shows Site Unlocked. Site Restriction Your Connect Plus radio system administrator has the ability to decide which network sites your radio is and is not allowed to use. Your radio does not need to be reprogrammed to change the list of allowed and disallowed sites. If your radio attempts to register at a disallowed site, you see a brief message stating:

M a k n g i a n d R e c e v n g C a i i l l s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 197 English Site <number given> Not Allowed. The radio then searches for a different network site. Selecting a Zone The radio can be programmed with a maximum of 16 Connect Plus Zones and each Connect Plus zone contains a maximum of 16 assignable positions on the Channel Selector Knob. Each assignable knob position can be used to start one of the following voice call types:

Group Call Multigroup Call Site All Call Private Call 1 Access the Zone feature by performing one of the Radio Con-

trols Radio menu Steps 1 2 to access the menu. or to Zone and press to select. The current zone is displayed and indicated by a

. 2 Select the required zone. Radio Control Steps or or and scroll to the re-

quired zone. following actions:

Radio Con-

trols Programmed Zone button Steps Press the programmed Zone button. 3 to select. Press The display shows <Zone> Selected momentarily and returns to the selected zone screen. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n i s l l i i a C g n v e c e R d n a g n k a M i 198 English Using Multiple Networks If your radio has been programmed to use multiple Connect Plus networks, you can select a different network by switching to the Connect Plus zone that is assigned to the desired network. These network-to-

zone assignments are configured by your dealer through radio programming. Selecting a Call Type M a k n g i a n d R e c e v n g C a i i Use the Channel Selector Knob to select a call type. This can be a Group Call, Multi-group Call, Site All Call or Private Call, depending on how your radio is programmed. If you change the Channel Selector Knob to a different position (that has a call type assigned to it), this causes the radio to re-register with the Connect Plus site. The radio registers with the Registration Group ID that has been programmed for the new Channel Selector Knob position call type. If you select a position that has no call type assigned to it, your radio sounds a continuous tone and the display shows Unprogrammed. Your radio does not operate when selected to an unprogrammed channel, use the Channel Selector Knob to select a programmed channel instead. Once the required zone is displayed (if you have multiple zones in your radio), turn the programmed Channel Selector Knob to select the call type. Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call Once the channel, subscriber ID or call type is displayed, you can proceed to receive and respond to calls. The LED lights up solid green while the radio is transmitting and blinks green when the radio is receiving. l l s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e Note:

The LED lights up solid green while the radio is transmitting and double blinks green when 199 English the radio is receiving a privacy-enabled call. To unscramble a privacy-enabled call, your radio must have the same Privacy Key, OR the same Key Value and Key ID (programmed by your dealer), as the transmitting radio (the radio you are receiving the call from). Note:

See Privacy on page 257 for more information. Receiving and Responding to a Group Call To receive a call from a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that group. When you receive a Group Call (while on the Home screen), the LED blinks green.The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias. The second text line displays the group call alias. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the radio's speaker. 1 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. The LED lights up solid green. 2 Wait for one of the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. Note:

See Making a Group Call on page 203 for details on making a Group Call. Receiving and Responding to a Private Call A Private Call is a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. When you receive a Private Call, the LED blinks green. The Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker of the radio. 1 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 2 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The LED lights up solid green. 3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n i s l l i i a C g n v e c e R d n a g n k a M i 200 English 4 Release the PTT button to listen. You cannot respond to an Site All Call. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended. See Making a Private Call on page 204 for details on making a Private Call. Receiving a Site All Call A Site All Call is a call from an individual radio to every radio on the site. It is used to make important announcements requiring the users full attention. When you receive an Site All Call, a tone sounds and the LED blinks green. The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias. The second text line displays Site All Call. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the radio speaker. Once the Site All Call ends, the radio returns to the previous screen before receiving the call. A Site All Call does not wait for a predetermined period of time before ending. Note:

See Making a Site All Call on page 205 for details on making a Site All Call. Note:

The radio stops receiving the Site All Call if you switch to a different channel while receiving the call. During a Site All Call, you will not be able to use any programmed button functions until the call ends. Receiving an Inbound Private Phone Call When you receive an Inbound Private Phone Call, the Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows Phone Call. 1 Press and hold the PTT button to answer and talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 2 to end the call. Long press The first line of the display shows Ending. The second line of the display shows Phone Call.... The display returns to the Phone Call screen. The display shows Phone Call Ended. M a k n g i a n d R e c e v n g C a i i l l s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 201 English Making a Buffered Over-Dial in an Inbound Phone Private Call During the call, the Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line of the display shows Phone Call. 1 Use the keypad to enter the digits and press the button. followed by within 2 seconds to Press insert a pause. The P replaces * and # on the display. The Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line of the display shows the entered digits. 2 to end the call. Long press The first line of the display shows Ending. The second line of the display shows Phone Call.... The display returns to the Phone Call screen. The display shows Phone Call Ended. Making a Live Over-Dial in an Inbound Phone Private Call During the call, the Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line of the display shows Phone Call. 1 Press the PTT button and use the keypad to enter the digits. The Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line of the display shows the Live Dial digits. 2 to end the call. Long press The first line of the display shows Ending. The second line of the display shows Phone Call.... The display returns to the Phone Call screen. The display shows Phone Call Ended. Receiving an Inbound Phone Talkgroup Call When you receive an Inbound Phone Talkgroup Call, the Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows Call1. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n i s l l i i a C g n v e c e R d n a g n k a M i 202 English Press the PTT button to talk and release it to listen. Inbound Phone Multi-Group Call When you receive an Inbound Phone Multi-Group Call, the Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows Multigroup Call. The radio unmutes and the incoming multi-group call sounds through the radio's speaker. Making a Radio Call After selecting your channel, you can select a subscriber alias or ID, or group alias or ID by using:

The Channel Selector Knob. A programmed One Touch Access button The One Touch Access feature allows you to make a Private Call to a predefined ID easily. This feature can be assigned to a short or long programmable button press. You can ONLY have one ID assigned to a One Touch Access button. Your radio can have multiple One Touch Access buttons programmed. The Contacts list (see Contacts Settings on page 222). Manual Dial This method is for Private Calls only and is dialed using the keypad (see Making a Private Call from Contacts on page 223, and Making a Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button on page 206). Note:

Your radio must have the Privacy feature enabled on the channel to send a privacy-

enabled transmission. Only target radios with the same Key Value and Key ID as your radio will be able to unscramble the transmission. Note:

See Privacy on page 257 for more information. Making a Call with the Channel Selector Knob Making a Group Call To make a call to a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that group. 1 Select the channel with the active group alias or ID. See Selecting a Call Type on page 199. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. M a k n g i a n d R e c e v n g C a i i l l s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 203 English 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the group call alias. 4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green, the radio unmutes and the response sounds through the radios speaker. You see the Group Call icon, the group alias or ID, and transmitting radio alias or ID on your display. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. Radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. Making a Private Call While you can receive and/or respond to a Private Call initiated by an authorized individual radio, your radio must be programmed for you to initiate a Private Call. You will hear a negative indicator tone, when you make a Private Call via the Contacts list, Call Log, e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n i s l l i i a C g n v e c e R d n a g n k a M i 204 English One Touch Access button, or the Channel Selector Knob, if this feature is not enabled. Use the Text Message or Call Alert features to contact an individual radio. See Text Message Features on page 244 or Call Alert Operation on page 101 for more information. 1 Do one of the following. Select the channel with the active subscriber alias or ID. See Selecting a Call Type on page 199. Press the programmed One Touch Access button. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The Private Call icon appears on the top right corner. The first text line shows the target subscriber alias. The second text line displays the call status. 4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended. Your radio may be programmed to perform a radio presence check prior to setting up the Private Call. If the target radio is not available, you hear a short tone and see negative mini notice on the display. Making a Site All Call This feature allows you to transmit to all users on the site that are currently not engaged in another call. Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. Users on the channel/site cannot respond to an Site All Call. 1 Select the channel with the active Site All Call group alias. See Selecting a Call Type on page 199. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows Site All Call. 4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. Making a Multi-group Call This feature allows you to transmit to all users on multiple groups. Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. Note:

Users on the groups cannot respond to a Multi-group Call. 1 Turn the Channel Selector Knob to select the Multi-group alias or ID. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The display shows the Multi-group alias or ID. Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. M a k n g i a n d R e c e v n g C a i i l l s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 205 English Making a Private Call with a One Touch Call Button Note:

Programmable buttons press must be initiated from the Home screen. The One Touch Call feature allows you to easily make a Private Call to a pre-defined Private Call alias or ID. This feature can be assigned to a short or long programmable button press. You can ONLY have one alias or ID assigned to a One Touch Call button. Your radio can have multiple One Touch Call buttons programmed. 1 Press the programmed One Touch Call button to make a Private Call to the pre-defined Private Call alias or ID. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The display shows the Private Call alias or ID. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n i s l l i i a C g n v e c e R d n a g n k a M i 206 English 4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. Making a Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button Making a Private Call 1 Press the programmed Manual Dial button to enter into the Manual Dial screen. The display shows Number:. 2 Use the keypad to enter a subscriber alias or Private ID. 3 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 4 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The second text line displays the call status. Press 5 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. 6 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended. Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button 1 Press the programmed Manual Dial button to enter into the Manual Dial screen. The display shows Number:. 2 Use the keypad to enter a telephone number, and 3 press to place a call to the entered number. to delete any unwanted characters. Press within 2 seconds to insert followed by a pause. The P replaces * and # on the display. If successful, the first line of the display shows Phone Call. The second line of the display shows the dialed telephone number. If an invalid telephone number is selected, the display shows a negative mini notice, Phone Call Failed, Resource Not Available, or Invalid Permissions. is pressed with no telephone number If entered, the radio sounds a positive indicator tone then a negative indicator tone. The display remains the same. to end the call. Long press The first line of the display shows Ending. The second line of the display shows Phone Call.... The display shows Phone Call Ended. M a k n g i a n d R e c e v n g C a i i l l s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 207 English Making an Outbound Private Phone Call via the Phone Menu 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Phone and press to select. to select Manual Dial. Press The first line of the display shows Number, the second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. 5 4 Use the keypad to enter a telephone number, and press to place a call to the entered number. If an invalid telephone number is selected, the display shows a negative mini notice, Phone Call Failed, Resource Not Available, or Invalid Permissions. is pressed with no telephone number If entered, the radio sounds a positive indicator tone then a negative indicator tone. The display remains the same. to end the call. Long press The first line of the display shows Ending. The second line of the display shows Phone Call.... The display shows Phone Call Ended. Press to delete any unwanted characters. Press within 2 seconds to insert followed by a pause. The P replaces * and # on the display. If successful, the first line of the display shows Phone Call. The second line of the display shows the dialed telephone number. Making an Outbound Private Phone Call from Contacts Note:

If the Phone Manual Dial is disabled in MOTOTRBO Connect Plus Option Board CPS, the Phone Number item will not be displayed in the Menu. 1 to access the menu. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n i s l l i i a C g n v e c e R d n a g n k a M i 208 English 2 3 4 or to Contacts and press to select. or select. to Manual Dial and press to to Phone Number and press or select. The first line of the display shows Number, the second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. to 5 Use the keypad to enter a telephone number, and press to place a call to the entered number. If the PTT button is pressed, the display shows a negative mini notice, Press OK to Send and returns to the previous screen. Press to delete any unwanted characters. Press within 2 seconds to insert followed by a pause. The P replaces * and # on the display. If successful, the first line of the display shows Phone Call. The second line of the display shows the dialed telephone number. M a k n g i is pressed with no telephone number If entered, the radio sounds a positive indicator tone then a negative indicator tone. The display remains the same. 6 to end the call. Long press The first line of the display shows Ending. The second line of the display shows Phone Call.... The display shows Phone Call Ended. Waiting for the Channel Grant in an Outbound Private Phone Call When you make a Private Phone Call, the first line of the display shows Phone Call. The second line of the display shows the dialed telephone number. When the call is connected, the Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first line of the display shows the telephone number. a n d R e c e v n g C a i i l l s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 209 English If unsuccessful, the display shows a negative mini notice, Phone Call Failed, Resource Not Available, or Invalid Permissions. Long press The display returns to the previous screen. to end the call. Making a Buffered Over-Dial in a Connected Outbound Private Phone Call During the call, the Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line of the display shows the telephone number. 1 Use the keypad to enter the digits. Press to delete any unwanted characters. Press within 2 seconds to insert followed by a pause. The P replaces * and # on the display. The first text line of the display shows Extra Digits, the second text line of the display shows the entered extra digits. 2 Press the button. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n i s l l i i a C g n v e c e R d n a g n k a M i 210 English If the PTT button is pressed, the display shows a negative mini notice, Press OK to Send and returns to the previous screen. The Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line of the display shows the telephone number with the over-dial digits appended. 3 Do one of the following. Press to return to the Phone Call screen. Long press to end the call. Making a Live Over-Dial in a Connected Outbound Private Phone Call During the call, the Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line of the display shows the telephone number. 1 Press the PTT button and use the keypad to enter the digits. The Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line of the display shows the telephone number with the over-dial digits appended. 2 to end the call. Long press The first line of the display shows Ending. The second line of the display shows Phone Call.... The display shows Phone Call Ended. M a k n g i a n d R e c e v n g C a i i l l s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 211 English Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode Auto Fallback Auto Fallback is a system feature that allows you to continue to make and receive non-emergency calls on the selected Group Contact in the event of certain types of Connect Plus system failures. If one of these failures occurs, your radio attempts to roam to a different Connect Plus site. This search process may result in your radio finding an operable Connect Plus site, or it may result in your radio finding a Fallback Channel (if your radio is enabled for Auto Fallback). A Fallback Channel is a repeater that is normally part of an operable Connect Plus site, but is currently unable to communicate with either its site controller or the Connect Plus network. In Fallback mode, the repeater operates as a single digital repeater. Auto Fallback Mode supports non-

emergency Group Calls only. No other call types are supported in Fallback Mode. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 212 English Indications of Auto Fallback Mode When your radio is using a Fallback channel, you hear the intermittent Fallback Tone approximately once every 15 seconds (except while transmitting). The display periodically shows a brief message, Fallback Channel. Your radio only permits PTT on the selected Group Contact (Group Call, Multigroup Call, or Site All Call). It does not allow you to make other types of calls. Making/Receiving Calls in Fallback Mode Note:

Calls are heard only by radios that are monitoring the same Fallback channel and selected to the same Group. Calls are not networked to other sites or other repeaters. Emergency voice calls or Emergency Alerts are not available in Fallback mode. If you press the emergency button in Fallback mode, the radio provides an invalid key press tone. Display-equipped radios also show the message, Feature not available. Private (radio to radio) and Phone calls are not available in Fallback mode. If you attempt a call to a private contact, you will receive a denial tone. At this point you should select a desired group contact. Other non-supported calls include Remote Monitor, Call Alert, Radio Check, Radio Enable, Radio Disable, Text messaging, Location Updates, and packet data calls. Enhanced Traffic Channel Access (ETCA) is not supported in Auto Fallback mode. If two or more radio users press PTT at the same time

(or at almost the same time), it is possible that both radios transmit until PTT is released. In this event, it is possible that none of the transmissions will be understood by receiving radios. Making calls in Fallback mode is similar to normal functioning. Simply select the group contact you wish to use (using the radios normal channel selection method), and then press the PTT to start your call. It is possible that the channel may be in use already by another group. If the channel is in use, you receive a busy tone and the display will say Channel Busy. You may select Group, Multi-group or Site All Call contacts using your radios normal channel selection method. While the radio is operating on the Fallback Channel, the Multigroup operates just like other Groups. It is only heard by radios that are currently selected to the same Multi-group. Returning to Normal Operation If the site returns to normal trunking operation while you are in range of your Fallback repeater, your radio automatically exits Auto Fallback mode. You hear a registration beep when the radio successfully registers. If you are in the range of an operable site

(that is not in Fallback mode), you may press the Roam Request button (if programmed for your radio) to force your radio to search for and register on an available site. If no other site is available, your radio returns to Auto Fallback mode after searching is complete. If you drive out of coverage of your Fallback repeater, your radio enters Search mode

(display indicates Searching). Radio Check If enabled, this feature allows you to determine if another radio is active in a system without disturbing the user of that radio. No audible or visual notification is shown on the target radio. This feature is only applicable for subscriber aliases or IDs. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 213 English Sending a Radio Check 1 Access the Radio Check feature. Steps 1 Press the programmed Radio Check button. 2 1 2 3 4 or to the required sub-

scriber alias or ID and press to select. to access the menu. or to Contacts and press to select. or to the required sub-

scriber alias or ID and press to select. or to Radio Check and press to select. Radio Control Program-

med Ra-

dio Check button Menu e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 214 English The display shows the Target Alias, indicating the request is in progress. The LED lights up solid green. 2 Wait for acknowledgement. If the target radio is active in the system, a tone sounds and the display briefly shows Target Radio Available. If the target radio is not active in the system, a tone sounds and the display briefly shows Target Radio Not Available. Radio returns to the subscriber alias or ID screen when initiated via Menu. Radio returns to the Home Screen if initiated via the programmable button. Remote Monitor Use the Remote Monitor feature to turn on the microphone of a target radio (subscriber alias or IDs only). The green LED will blink once on the target subscriber. You can use this feature to monitor, remotely, any audible activity surrounding the target radio. Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. Radio Control Steps Initiating Remote Monitor Note:

Remote Monitor automatically stops after a programmed duration or when there is any attempt to initiate transmission, change channels or power down the radio. 1 Access the Remote Monitor feature. Radio Control Program-

med Re-

mote Monitor Button Menu Steps 1 Press the programmed Remote Monitor button. 2 1 or to the required sub-

scriber alias or ID and press to select. to access the menu. 2 3 4 5 or to Contacts and press to select. or to the required sub-

scriber alias or ID and press to select. or to Manual Dial and press or to select. to Remote Mon. and press to select. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e The first text line shows Rem. Monitor. The second text line displays the Target Alias, indicating the request is in progress. The LED lights up blinking green. 2 Wait for acknowledgement. If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the display momentarily shows Rem. Monitor 215 English Successful. Your radio starts playing audio from the monitored radio for a programmed duration and display shows Rem. Monitor, followed by target alias. Once the timer expires, the radio sounds an alert tone and the LED turns off. If unsuccessful, the radio sounds a negative indicator tone the display shows Rem. Monitor Failed. e d o M s u P l Scan This feature allows your radio to monitor and join calls for groups defined in a pre-programmed scan list. When scan is enabled, the scan icon appears on the status bar and the LED blinks yellow when idle. Starting and Stopping Scan Note:

This procedure turns the Scan feature On or Off for all Connect Plus zones with the same Network ID as your currently selected zone. It is important to note that even when the Scan feature is turned on via this procedure, scan may still be disabled for some (or all) groups on your scan list. See Editing the Scan List on page 218 for more information. t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 216 English You can start and stop scanning by pressing the programmed Scan button OR follow the procedure described next. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or or to Scan and press to select. to Turn On or Turn Off and press to select. The display shows Scan On if scan is enabled. The Scan menu shows Turn Off if scan is enabled. The display shows Scan Off if scan is disabled. The Scan menu shows Turn On if scan is disabled. Responding to a Transmission During a Scan During scanning, your radio stops on a group where activity is detected. The radio continuously listens for any member in the scan list when idle on the control channel. 1 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 2 Press the PTT button during hang time. The LED lights up solid green. 3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. If you do not respond within the hang time, the radio returns to scanning other groups. Scan can be turned on or off from the menu or by pressing a programmed Scan On/Off button. This feature functions only when the radio is not currently involved in a call. If you are presently listening to a call, your radio cannot scan for other group calls, and is therefore unaware they are in progress. Once your call is finished, your radio returns to the control channel time slot and is able to scan for groups that are in the scan list. Turning Scan On or Off User Configurable Scan If the Edit List menu is enabled, a user is able to Add and Remove the scan members from the Add Member menu. A Scan List member must be a regular Group Contact (i.e. not Multi-group or Site All Call/Network Wide All Call) that is currently assigned to a Channel Selector position in a Connect Plus Zone with the same Network ID as the currently selected Zone. The Talkgroup alias must not match any Talkgroup that has been included in the current Zone's Scan List. Note:

This procedure turns the Scan feature On or Off for all zones with the same Network ID as your currently selected zone. It is important to note that even when the Scan feature is turned on via this procedure, scan may still be disabled for some (or all) groups on your scan list. See the next section for more information. If Scan is turned on, the Scan icon appears on your display. When Scan is on and you are not participating in a call, the LED blinks green and yellow. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 217 English The procedure for turning Scan on or off depends on how your radio is programmed. If programmed with a Scan On/Off button, use the button to toggle the feature on or off. If your radio has been programmed so that Scan can be turned on or off via the menu, follow the procedure described next. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or or to Scan and press to select. to Turn On or Turn Off and press to select. The display shows Scan On momentarily if scan is disabled. The display shows Scan Off momentarily if scan is enabled. Editing the Scan List Note:

If the scan list entry happens to be the radios currently selected group, the radio listens for e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 218 English activity on this group regardless of whether the list entry currently shows a check mark or not. Whenever a radio is not in a call, the radio listens for activity on its Selected Group, Multigroup, the Site All Call, and its Default Emergency Revert Group (if configured for one). This operation cannot be disabled. If Scan is enabled the radio will also listen for activity on enabled Zone Scan List members. Your scan list determines which groups can be scanned. The list is created when your radio is programmed. If your radio has been programmed to allow you to edit the scan list, you can, Enable/disable scan for individual groups on the list. Add and Remove the scan members from the Add Member menu. Refer to Add or Delete a Group via the Add Members Menu on page 219. Note:

A Scan List member must be a regular Group Contact (i.e. not Multigroup or Site All Call/

Network Wide All Call) that is currently assigned to a Channel Selector position in a Connect Plus Zone with the same Network ID as the currently selected Zone. 1 2 3 4 The Talkgroup alias must not match any Talkgroup that has been included in the current Zone's Scan List. to access the menu. or select. to View/Edit List and press to or to the desired Group name. If a check mark precedes the Group name, then scan is currently enabled for this Group. If there is no check mark preceding the Group name, then scan is currently disabled for this Group. to select the desired Group. The display shows Enable if scan is currently disabled for the Group. The display shows Disable if scan is currently enabled for the Group. 5 Select the displayed option (Enable or Disable) to select. and press Depending on which option was selected, the radio momentarily displays Scan Enabled or Scan Disabled as confirmation. The radio displays the Zone scan list again. If scan was enabled for the Group, the check mark displays before the Group name. If scan was disabled for the Group, the check mark is removed before the Group name. Add or Delete a Group via the Add Members Menu The Connect Plus radio does not allow a duplicate group number or a duplicate group alias to be placed on a zone scan list (or to be shown as a scan candidate). Thus, the list of scan candidates described in steps 6 and 7 sometimes changes after adding or deleting a group from the zone scan list. If your radio has been programmed to allow you to edit the scan list, you can use the Add Members menu to add a group to the scan list of the currently A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 219 English selected zone, or to delete a group from the san list of the currently selected zone. to access the menu. or to Scan option and press to select. to <Add Members> and press or select. The display shows Add Members from Zone n (n

= the Connect Plus zone number of the first Connect Plus zone in your radio with the same Network ID as your currently selected zone). to 4 Do one of the following. If the group you want to add to the scan list is assigned to a channel selector position in that zone, go to step 6. If the group you want to add to the scan list is assigned to a channel selector position in a different Connect Plus zone, go to step 5. 1 2 3 e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 5 or to scroll a list of Connect Plus zones that have the same Network ID as the currently selected zone. 6 After locating the Connect Plus zone where the desired group is assigned to a channel selector to select. position, press Your radio displays the first entry in a list of groups assigned to a channel position in that zone. The groups on the list are called scan candidates, because they can be added to the scan list of your currently selected zone (or they are already on the zone scan list). If the zone does not have any groups that can be added to the scan list, the radio displays No Candidates. 7 to scroll through the list of candidate or groups. If a plus sign (+) is displayed immediately before the group alias, this indicates the group is currently on the scan list for the selected zone. 220 English 8 9 If the plus sign (+) is not displayed immediately before the alias, the group is not currently on the scan list, but can be added. when the desired group alias is Press displayed. If this group is not currently on the scan list for the currently selected zone, the Add (Group Alias) message is displayed. If this group is already on the scan list for the currently selected zone, the Delete (Group Alias) message is displayed. to accept the displayed message (Add Press or Delete). If deleting a group from the list, you will know the operation is successful because the plus sign (+) will no longer display immediately before the alias. If adding a group to the list, you will know the operation is successful because the plus sign (+) will display before the alias. If you are attempting to add a group, and the list is already full, the radio displays List Full. If this should occur, it will be necessary to delete a group from the scan list prior to adding a new one. 10 When finished, press necessary to return to the desired menu. as many times as Understanding Scan Operation Note:

If the Radio joins a call for a Zone Scan List member from a different Zone and Call Hang Timer expires before you are able to respond, in order to respond, you must navigate to the Zone and Channel of the Scan List Member and start a new call. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e There are some circumstances in which you can miss calls for groups that are in your scan list. When you miss a call for one of the following reasons, this does not indicate a problem with your radio. This is a normal scan operation for Connect Plus. Scan feature is not turned on (check for the scan icon on the display). 221 English Scan list member has been disabled via the menu

(see Editing the Scan List on page 218). You are participating in a call already. No member of the scanned group is registered at your site (Multisite systems only). Scan Talkback If your radio scans into a call from the selectable group scan list, and if the PTT button is pressed during the scanned call, the operation of the radio depends on whether Scan Talkback was enabled or disabled during radio programming. For more information on how your radio is programmed, contact your radio dealer (or your radio system administrator). Scan Talkback Disabled The radio leaves the scanned call and attempts to transmit on the contact for the currently selected channel position. After the Call Hang Time on the currently selected contact expires, the radio returns to the home channel and starts the Scan Hang Time Timer. The radio resumes group scan after its Scan Hang Time Timer expires. Scan Talkback Enabled If the PTT button is pressed during the Group Hang Time of the scanned call, the radio attempts to transmit to the scanned group. Note:

If you scan into a call for a group that is not assigned to a channel position in the currently selected zone and you miss the Hang Time of the call, switch to the proper zone and then select the channel position of the group to talk back to that group. Contacts Settings Note:

You can add, or edit subscriber IDs for Connect Plus Contacts. Deleting subscriber IDs can only be performed by your dealer. If the Privacy feature is enabled on a channel, you can make a privacy-enabled voice call on that channel. Only target radios with the same Privacy Key, or the same Key Value and Key ID as your radio are able to unscramble the transmission. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 222 English Contacts provide address-book capabilities on your radio. Each entry corresponds to an alias or ID that you use to initiate a call. Each zone provides a Contact List with up to 100 contacts. The following contact types are available:

Private Call Group Call Multigroup Call Site All Call Voice Site All Call Text Dispatch Call The Dispatch Call contact type is used to send a text message to a dispatcher PC through a third-party Text Message Server. Making a Private Call from Contacts 1 2 to access the menu. or to Contacts and press to select. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 Use one of the steps described next to select the required subscriber alias:

Select the subscriber alias directly. or to the required subscriber alias or ID. Use the Manual Dial menu. or to Manual Dial and press to select. If there was previously dialed subscriber alias or ID, the alias or ID appears along with a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to edit/enter the ID. Press to select. 4 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 5 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The display shows the destination alias. 6 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 223 English 7 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green and the display shows the transmitting user's ID. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended. Making a Call Alias Search You can also use alias or alphanumeric search to retrieve the required subscriber alias. This feature is only applicable while in Contacts. 4 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 5 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The display shows the destination alias. 6 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 7 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. The display shows Call Ended. to access the menu. Adding a New Contact or to Contacts and press to select. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 Key in the first character of the required alias, and to locate the required alias. then press or 1 2 to access the menu. or to Contacts and press to select. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 224 1 2 English 3 or select. to New Contact and press to 4 Use the keypad to enter the contact number and press to confirm. 5 Use the keypad to enter the contact name and press to confirm. 6 If adding a Radio Contact, or to the required ringer type and press The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display shows Contact Saved. to select. Call Indicator Settings Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Call Alert You can select, or turn on or off ringing tones for a received Call Alert. 1 to access the menu. 2 3 4 5 6 7 or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Tones/Alert and press to to Call Ringers and press to A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e to to Call Alert and press or select. The current tone is indicated by a

. or select. to the required tone and press to appears beside selected tone. 225 English Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Private Calls Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Text Message You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a received Private Call. You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a received Text Message. to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Tones/Alerts and press to to Call Ringers and press to to Private Call and press to 1 2 3 4 5 6 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Tones/Alerts and press to to Call Ringers and press to to Text Message and press to 1 2 3 4 5 6 e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 226 English The current tone is indicated by a

. 7 or select. to the required tone and press to appears beside selected tone. Selecting a Ring Alert Type Note:

The programmed Ring Alert Type button is assigned via CPS. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. You can program the radio calls to one predetermined vibrate call. If All Tones status is disabled, the radio displays the All Tone Mute icon. If All Tones status is enabled, the related ring alert type is displayed. The radio sounds one vibration if it is a momentary ring style. The radio vibrates repetitively if it is a repetitive ring style. When set to Ring and Vibrate, the radio sounds a specific ring tone if there is any incoming radio transaction (for example, Call Alert or Message). It sounds like a good key tone or missed call. For radios with batteries that support the vibrate feature and are attached to a vibrating belt clip, the available Ring Alert Type options are Silent, Ring, Vibrate, and Ring and Vibrate. For radios with batteries that do not support the vibrate feature and are not attached to a vibrating belt clip, Ring Alert Type is automatically set to Ring. The available Ring Alert Type options are Silent and Ring. You can select a Ring Alert Type by performing one of the following actions. Press the programmed Ring Alert Type button to access the Ring Alert Type menu. a) Press or to Ring, Vibrate, Ring &

Vibrate or Silent and press to select. Access this feature via the menu. a) b) Press to access the menu. Press to select. or to Utilities and press A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 227 English c) Press or to Radio Settings and press d) Press to select. or to Tones/Alerts and press Press the programmed Vibrate Style button to access the Vibrate Style menu. a) Press or to Short, Medium, or Long to select. or e) Press to Ring Alert Type and Access this feature via the menu. and press to select. press f) Press to select. or to Ring, Vibrate, Ring &

Vibrate or Silent and press to select. Configuring Vibrate Style Note:

The programmed Vibrate Style button is assigned via CPS. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. Vibrate Style is enabled when the Vibrating Belt Clip is attached to the radio with a battery that supports the vibrate feature. You can configure the vibrate style by performing one of the following actions. a) b) Press to access the menu. Press to select. c) Press press d) Press or or to Utilities and press to Radio Settings and to select. or to Tones/Alerts and press to select. or e) Press to select. or f) Press to Vibrate Style and press to Short, Medium, or Long and press to select. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 228 English Escalating Alarm Tone Volume You can program your radio to continually alert you when a radio call remains unanswered. This is done by automatically increasing the alarm tone volume over time. This feature is known as Escalert. Call Log Features Your radio keeps track of all recent outgoing, answered, and missed Private Calls. Use the call log feature to view and manage recent calls. You can perform the following tasks in each of your call lists:

Delete View Details Viewing Recent Calls The lists are Missed, Answered, and Outgoing. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Call Log and press to select. 3 4 to preferred list and press or select. The display shows the most recent entry at the top of the list. to or to view the list. Press the PTT button to start a Private Call with the current selected alias or ID. Deleting a Call from a Call List 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Call Log and press to select. to to the required list and press or select. When you select a call list and it contains no entries, the display shows List Empty, and sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on

(see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page 152). A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 229 English 4 5 or to the required alias or ID and press to select. or to Delete and press to select. 6 Do one of the following:

4 5 or to the required alias or ID and press to select. to View Details and press or select. Display shows details. to e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A Press The display shows Entry Deleted. to select Yes to delete the entry. or to No, and press the return to the previous screen. button to Viewing Details from a Call List 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Call Log and press to select. or select. to the required list and press to 230 English Call Alert Operation Call Alert paging enables you to alert a specific radio user to call you back when they are able to do so. This feature is accessible through the menu via Contacts, manual dial or a programmed One Touch Access button. Receiving and Responding to a Call Alert When you receive a Call Alert page, you see the notification list listing a Call Alert with the alias or ID of the calling radio on the display. When you hear a repetitive tone and the LED blinks yellow, do one of the following:

Press the PTT button while the display still shows the Call Alert in the Notification List to respond with a Private Call. Press is moved to the Missed Call Log. to exit the Notification List. The alert See Notification List on page 270 for details about the Notification List. See Call Log Features on page 229 for details about the Missed Call List. 4 Making a Call Alert from the Contact List 1 2 to access the menu. or to Contacts and press to select. 3 Use one of the steps described next to select the required subscriber alias or ID:

select the subscriber alias directly or to the required subscriber alias A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e use the Manual Dial menu or to select. to Manual Dial and press The Manual Dial text entry screen shall be displayed. Enter the Subscriber ID and press

. to to Call Alert and press or select. The display shows Call Alert: <Subscriber Alias or ID>Call Alert and the subscriber alias or ID, indicating that the Call Alert has been sent. The LED lights up solid green when your radio is sending the Call Alert. If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, the display shows Call Alert Successful. If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received, the display shows Call Alert Failed. and press to select. 231 English Making a Call Alert with the One Touch Access Button Press the programmed One Touch Access button to make a Call Alert to the predefined alias. The display shows Call Alert and the subscriber alias or ID, indicating that the Call Alert has been sent. The LED lights up solid green when your radio is sending the Call Alert. If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, the display shows Call Alert Successful. If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received, the display shows Call Alert Failed. Emergency Operation Note:

If your radio is programmed for Silent or Silent with Voice emergency initiation, in most cases it automatically exits silent operation after the Emergency Call or Emergency Alert is finished. The exception to this rule is when Emergency Alert is the configured Emergency Mode and Silent is the configured Emergency Type. If your radio is programmed in this e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 232 English manner, the silent operation continues until you cancel silent operation by pressing PTT or the button configured for Emergency Off. Emergency voice calls and Emergency Alerts are not supported when operating in Connect Plus Auto Fallback mode. For more information see the Auto Fallback on page 212. An Emergency Alert is used to indicate a critical situation. You can initiate an Emergency at any time on any screen display, even when there is activity on the current channel. Pressing the Emergency button initiates the programmed Emergency mode. The programmed Emergency mode may also be initiated by triggering the optional Man Down feature. The Emergency feature may be disabled in your radio. Your dealer can set the duration of a button press for the programmed Emergency button, except for long press, which is similar with all other buttons:

Short press Between 0.05 seconds and 0.75 seconds. Long press Between 1.00 second and 3.75 seconds. The Emergency button is assigned with the Emergency On/Off feature. Check with your dealer for the assigned operation of the Emergency button. If the short press for the Emergency button is assigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then the long press for the Emergency button is assigned to exit the Emergency mode. If the long press for the Emergency button is assigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then the short press for the Emergency button is assigned to exit the Emergency mode. When your radio is selected to a Connect Plus zone, it supports three Emergency modes:

Emergency Call Emergency Call with Voice to Follow You must press the PTT button to talk on the assigned emergency time slot. For the first transmission on the assigned emergency time slot, the microphone is automatically unmuted and you may talk without pressing the PTT button. The microphone stays hot in this fashion for a time period programmed into the radio. For Emergency Alert subsequent transmissions in the same Emergency call, you must press the PTT button. An Emergency Alert is not a voice call. It is an emergency notification that is sent to radios that are configured to receive these alerts. The radio sends an emergency alert via the control channel of the currently registered site. The Emergency Alert is received by radios in the Connect Plus network that are programmed to receive them (no matter which network site they are registered to). Only one of the Emergency Modes can be assigned to the Emergency button per zone. In addition, each Emergency mode has the following types:

Regular Silent Radio initiates an Emergency and shows audio and/or visual indicators. Radio initiates an Emergency without any audio or visual indicators. The radio suppresses all audio or visual indications of the Emergency until you A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 233 English press the PTT button to start a voice transmission. The same as Silent operation, except that the radio also unmutes for some voice transmissions. Silent with Voice Emergency ends. You can save the emergency details to the Alarm List, or you can delete the emergency details as described in the following sections. Saving the Emergency Details to the Alarm List Receiving an Incoming Emergency Your radio may be programmed to sound an alert tone and also display information about the incoming Emergency. If so programmed, upon receiving the incoming Emergency, the display shows the Emergency Details screen with the emergency icon, the Alias or ID of the radio that requested the Emergency, the Group Contact being used for the Emergency, and one additional line of information. The additional information is the name of the zone that contains the Group Contact. At the present time, the radio displays only the most recently decoded Emergency. If a new Emergency is received before the prior Emergency is cleared, the details for the new Emergency replace the details of the previous Emergency. Depending on how your radio has been programmed, the Emergency Details screen (or Alarm List screen) will stay on your radios display even after the e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 234 English Saving the emergency details to the Alarm List allows you to view the details again at a later time by selecting Alarm List from the Main Menu. 1 While the Emergency Details (or Alarm List) screen is displayed, press The Exit Alarm List screen displays. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

Select Yes and press emergency details to the Alarm List, and to exit the Emergency Details (or Alarm List) screen. to save the Select No and press to return to the Emergency Details (or Alarm List) screen. Deleting the Emergency Details 1 While the Emergency Details screen is displayed, press The Delete screen displays. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

Select Yes and press emergency details. to delete the Select No and press Emergency Details screen. to return to the Responding to an Emergency Call Note:

If you do not respond to the Emergency Call within the time allotted for the Emergency Call Hang Time, the Emergency call will end. If you want to speak to the group after the Emergency Call Hang Time expires, you must first select the channel position assigned to the group (if not already selected). Then, press PTT to start a non-Emergency Call to the group. 1 When receiving an Emergency Call, press any button to stop all Emergency Call received indications. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to initiate a voice transmission on the Emergency group. All radios that are monitoring this group hear your transmission. 4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. The LED lights up green. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. When the emergency initiating radio responds, the LED blinks green. You see the Group Call icon, the group ID, and transmitting radio ID on your display. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e Responding to an Emergency Alert Note:

The Group contact used for the Emergency Alert should not be used for voice communication. This could prevent other 235 English radios from sending and receiving Emergency Alerts on the same group. An Emergency Alert from a radio indicates that the user is in an urgent situation. You may respond to the alert by initiating a private call to the radio who declared the emergency, initiating a group call to a designated talk group, sending the radio a Call Alert, initiating a Remote Monitor of that radio, etc. The proper response is determined by your organization and the individual situation. Initiating an Emergency Call Note:

If your radio is set to Silent, it does not display any audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode until you press the PTT button to initiate a voice transmission. If your radio is set to Silent with Voice, it does not initially display any audio or visual indicators that the radio is in Emergency mode. However, your radio unmutes for the transmissions of radios responding to your emergency. The emergency indicators only appear once you press the PTT button to initiate a voice transmission from your radio. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 236 English For both Silent and Silent with Voice operation, the radio automatically exits silent operation after the Emergency Call is finished. 1 Press the programmed Emergency button. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to initiate a voice transmission on the Emergency group. When you release the PTT button, the Emergency call continues for the time allotted for the Emergency Call Hang Time. If you press the PTT button during this time, the Emergency call continues. Initiating an Emergency Call with Voice to Follow Your radio must be programmed for this type of operation. When enabled for this operation, when you press the programmed Emergency button, and when your radio receives the time slot assignment, the microphone is automatically activated without pressing the PTT button. This activated microphone state is also known as hot mic. The hot mic applies to the first voice transmission from your radio during the Emergency call. For subsequent transmissions in the same Emergency call, you must press the PTT button. 1 Press the programmed Emergency button. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 The microphone remains active for the hot mic time specified in your radio's codeplug programming. During this time, the LED lights up green. 4 Press and hold the PTT button to talk longer than the programmed duration. Initiating an Emergency Alert Note:

If your radio is programmed for Silent or Silent with Voice, it will not provide any audio or visual indications that it is sending an Emergency Alert. If programmed for Silent, the silent operation continues indefinitely until you press PTT or the button configured for Emergency Off. If programmed for Silent with Voice, the radio automatically cancels silent operation when the site controller broadcasts the Emergency Alert. Press the orange Emergency button. Upon transmitting the Emergency Alert to the site controller, the radios display shows the Emergency icon, the Group contact used for the Emergency Alert, and TX Alarm. Once the Emergency Alert is successfully sent and is being broadcast for other radios to hear, a positive indicator tone sounds and the radios display shows Alarm Sent. If the Emergency Alert is unsuccessful, a negative indicator tone sounds and the radio displays Alarm Failed. Exiting Emergency Mode Note:

If the Emergency call ends due to the expiration of the Emergency Hang Time, but the emergency condition is not over, press the Emergency button again to restart the process. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 237 English If you initiate an Emergency Alert by pressing the programmed Emergency button, your radio automatically exits Emergency mode after receiving a response from the Connect Plus system. If you initiate an Emergency call by pressing the programmed Emergency button, your radio will be assigned a channel automatically when one becomes available. Once your radio has transmitted a message indicating the emergency, you cannot cancel your Emergency call. However, if you pressed the button by accident or the emergency no longer exists, you may wish to say this over the assigned channel. When you release the PTT button, the Emergency call is discontinued after the Emergency Call Hang Time expires. If your radio was configured for Emergency with Voice to Follow, use the hot mic period to explain your error, then press and release the PTT button to discontinue the transmission. The Emergency call is discontinued after the Emergency Call Hang Time expires. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 238 English Man Down Alarms Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e only. Man Down Alarms are not supported when operating in Fallback mode. For more information see the Auto Fallback on page 212. This section describes the Connect Plus Man Down Feature. This is a purchasable feature that may or may not apply to your radio. Your Connect Plus portable radio can be enabled and programmed for one or more of the Man Down Alarms. Your dealer or radio system administrator can tell you whether or not this applies to your radio and which specific Man Down Alarms have been enabled and programmed. If your radio has been programmed for one or more of the following Man Down Alarms, it is important for you to understand how the Alarm works, what indication

(tones) your radio provides, and the action you should take. The purpose of the Man Down Alarms is to alert others when you might be in danger. This is accomplished by programming your radio to detect a certain angle of tilt, lack of movement, or movement, depending on which Man Down Alarm(s) is/are enabled. If your radio detects a disallowed movement type, and if the condition is not corrected in a certain period of time, the radio starts to play an Alert Tone (if so programmed). At this point you should immediately take one or more of the corrective actions discussed below, depending on which Man Down Alarm(s) has/

have been enabled for your radio. If you do not take corrective action within a certain period of time, your radio automatically starts an Emergency (either an Emergency Call or Emergency Alert). Tilt Alarm When your radio is tilted at or beyond a specified angle for a period of time, it plays an Alert Tone (if so programmed). To prevent the radio from automatically starting an Emergency Call or Emergency Alert, restore the radio to the vertical position immediately. Anti-Movement Alarm When your radio is motionless for a period of time, it plays an Alert Tone (if so programmed). To prevent the radio from automatically starting an Emergency Call or Emergency Alert, move the radio immediately. Movement Alarm When your radio is in motion for a period of time, it plays an Alert Tone (if so programmed). To prevent the radio from automatically starting an Emergency Call or Emergency Alert, stop the radios motion immediately. Your dealer or radio system administrator can tell you which of the above alarms (if any) has been enabled through radio programming. It is possible to enable both the Tilt and Anti- Movement Alarms. In that case, the Alert Tone plays when the radio detects the first movement violation. Instead of taking the corrective actions discussed above, you can also prevent the radio from starting the Emergency call or Emergency Alert by using a programmable button, if your radio has been configured in this manner. This is discussed in the next two sections. Turning Man Down Alarms On and Off Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e only. The programmed Man Down button and Man Down settings are assigned via CPS. Check with your dealer or system A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 239 English administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. If you enable Man Down to maximum sensitivity and set Vibrate Style to high, the radio automatically restricts Vibrate Style to medium. This function prevents high Vibrate Style from initiating the Man Down emergency feature. The procedure for turning the Man Down Alarms On and Off depends on how your radio is programmed. If programmed with a Man Down Alarms On/Off button, use the button to toggle the Man Down Alarms On and Off. This applies to all of the Man Down Alarms enabled for your radio. When using the programmable button to toggle the Man Down Alarms On, your radio plays a tone that rises in pitch and displays a brief confirmation message. When using the programmable button to toggle the Man Down Alarms Off, your radio plays a tone that falls in pitch and shows a brief confirmation message. In order to hear the tones described above when turning the Man Down Alarms On and Off, the e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 240 English MOTOTRBO radio and Connect Plus Option Board must both be enabled for keypad tones. If your radio has been programmed so that Man Down Alarms can be turned On and Off via the menu, perform the following procedure. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Connect Plus and press to to to Man Down Alarm and press or select. If Man Down Alarm is currently disabled, the Enable option is shown. If Man Down Alarm is currently enabled, the Disable option is shown. 5 or to select. to Enable or Disable and press Resetting the Man Down Alarms Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e only. If your radio has been programmed with either a Man Down Alarms Reset button, or the Man Down Alarms menu option, it is possible to reset the Man Down Alarms without turning them On or Off. This stops any Man Down Alert Tone that is currently playing, and it also resets the Alarm timers. However, it is still necessary to correct the movement violation by taking the appropriate corrective action described in the Man Down Alarms section. If the movement violation is not corrected within a period of time, the Alert Tone starts playing again. The procedure for resetting the Man Down Alarms depends on how your radio is programmed. If programmed with a Man Down Alarms Reset button, use the button to Reset the Man Down Alarms. This applies to all of the Man Down Alarms enabled for your radio. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t When using the programmable button to reset the Man Down Alarms, the radio shows a brief confirmation message. If your radio has been programmed so that Man Down Alarms can be Reset via the menu, follow the procedure below. 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. to Connect Plus and press to to Man Down Alarm and press to l P u s M o d e or to Reset and press to select. The radio displays a brief confirmation message. 241 English Beacon Feature This section describes the Beacon feature. The Beacon feature is part of Connect Plus Man Down, a purchasable feature. Your dealer or Radio System Administrator can tell you if the Beacon feature applies to your radio. If your radio has been enabled and programmed for one or more of the Man Down Alarms, it can also be enabled for the Beacon feature. If your radio automatically starts an Emergency Call or Emergency Alert due to one of the Man Down Alarms, and if your radio is also enabled for the Beacon feature, the radio starts to periodically emit a high pitched tone approximately once every ten seconds. The interval can vary depending on whether you are talking on your radio. The purpose of the Beacon tone is to help searchers locate you. If your radio has also been enabled for the Visual Beacon, the radios backlight comes on for a few seconds every time the Beacon tone plays. You can stop your radio from playing the Beacon tone by using a programmable button, if your radio has been configured in this manner. This is discussed in the next two sections. If your radio does not have the e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 242 English programmable button or menu option, you can stop the Beacon tone by turning the radio off and then on again, or by changing to a different zone (if your radio has been programmed for more than one zone). Turning Beacon On and Off The procedure for turning the Beacon On and Off depends on how your radio is programmed. If programmed with a Beacon On/Off button, use the button to toggle the Beacon On and Off. When using the programmable button to toggle the Beacon On, your radio plays a tone that rises in pitch and shows a brief confirmation message. When using the programmable button to toggle the Beacon Off, your radio plays a tone that falls in pitch and shows a brief confirmation message. In order to hear the tones described above when turning the Beacon On and Off, the MOTOTRBO radio and Connect Plus Option Board must both be enabled for keypad tones. If your radio has been programmed so that the Beacon can be turned On and Off via the menu, follow the procedure below. 1 to access the menu. 2 3 4 5 or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Connect Plus and press to or to Beacon and press to select. If Beacon is currently disabled, the Enable option is shown. If Beacon is currently enabled, the Disable option is shown. or to Enable or Disable and press to select. The radio shows a brief message to confirm that Man Down Beacon was enabled (or disabled). Resetting the Beacon If your radio has been programmed with either the Beacon Reset button, or the Beacon menu option, it is possible to reset the Beacon. This stops the Beacon Tone (and also the Visual Beacon) without A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t turning the Beacon feature Off. The procedure for resetting the Beacon depends on how your radio is programmed. If programmed with a Beacon Reset button, use the button to Reset the Beacon. When using the programmable button to reset the Man Down Alarms, your radio shows a brief confirmation message. If your radio has been programmed so that the Beacon can be Reset via the menu, follow the procedure below. 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Connect Plus and press to or to Beacon and press to select. l P u s M o d e or to Reset and press to select. The radio displays a brief confirmation message. 243 English Text Message Features Your radio is able to receive data, for example a text message, from another radio or a text message application. The maximum length of characters for sending a text message, including the subject line (seen when receiving message from an e-mail application), depends on CPS configuration which can be configured up to maximum 280 characters. Your radio can receive a text message with maximum length of 280 characters. If user forwards a text message with characters more than the maximum length, the text message will be truncated to the maximum length. The radio exits the current screen once the inactivity timer expires. Note:

Long press Home screen. at any time to return to the Writing and Sending a Text Message 1 Access the Text Message feature. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 244 English Radio Controls Program-

med Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Mes-

sage button. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Messages and press to select. 2 or to Compose and press A blinking cursor appears. to select. 3 Use the keypad to type your message. to move one space to the left. Press key to move one space to the right. key to delete any unwanted Press the Press the characters. Long press method. to change text entry or 4 Press once message is composed. 5 If you are sending the message, select the recipient by to select. or to the required alias and press or to Manual Dial, and press to select. The first line of the display shows Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or ID and press

. The display shows Sending Message, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows Message Sent. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Message Send Failed. If the text message fails to send, the radio returns you to the Resend option screen (see Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages on page 248). Sending a Quick Text Message Your radio supports a maximum of 10 Quick Text messages as programmed by your dealer. While Quick Text messages are predefined, you can edit each message before sending it. If you are sending the message, select the recipient by or to the required alias and press to select. or to Manual Dial, and press to select. The first line of the display shows Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or ID and press

. The display shows Sending Message, confirming your message is being sent. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 245 English If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows Message Sent. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Message Send Failed. If the text message fails to send, the radio returns you to the Resend option screen (see Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages on page 248). Sending a Quick Text Message with the One Touch Access Button e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 246 Press the programmed One Touch Access button to send a predefined Quick Text message to a predefined alias. The display shows Sending Message, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows Message Sent. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Message Send Failed. If the text message fails to send, the radio returns you to the Resend option screen (see Managing Fail-to-

Send Text Messages on page 248). English Accessing the Drafts Folder You can save a text message to send it at a later time. If a PTT button press or a mode change causes the radio to exit the text message writing/editing screen while you are in the process of writing or editing a text message, your current text message is automatically saved to the Drafts folder. The most recent saved text message is always added to the top of the Drafts list. The Drafts folder stores a maximum of ten (10) last saved messages. When the folder is full, the next saved text message automatically replaces the oldest text message in the folder. Note:

Long press Home screen. at any time to return to the Viewing a Saved Text Message 1 Access the Text Message feature. Radio Con-

trols Programmed Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Messages and press to select. 4 2 3 or or to Drafts and press to select. to the required message and press to select. Editing and Sending a Saved Text Message 1 2 Press again while viewing the message. or to Edit and press to select. A blinking cursor appears. 3 Use the keypad to type your message. to move one space to the left. Press key to move one space to the right. key to delete any unwanted Press the Press the characters. Long press method. to change text entry Press once message is composed. 5 Select the message recipient by or to select. to the required alias and press or to Manual Dial, and press to select. The first line of the display shows Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or A d v a n c e d F e a t or u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e ID and press

. 247 English The display shows Sending Message, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows Message Sent. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Message Send Failed. If the text message cannot be sent, it is moved to the Sent Items folder and marked with a Send Failed icon. Deleting a Saved Text Message from Drafts 1 Access the Text Message feature. Radio Con-

trols Programmed Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Messages and press to select. 2 3 4 or or to Drafts and press to select. to the required message and press to select. or to Delete and press text message. to delete the Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages You can select one of the following options while at the Resend option screen:

Resend Forward Edit Resending a Text Message to resend the same message to the Press same subscriber/group alias or ID. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows the positive mini notice. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 248 English If the message cannot be sent, the display shows the negative mini notice. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Message Send Failed. Forwarding a Text Message Select Forward to send the message to another subscriber/group alias or ID. 1 or to Forward and press to select. Editing a Text Message Select Edit to edit the message before sending it. 1 or to Edit and press A blinking cursor appears. to select. 2 Select the message recipient by 2 Use the keypad to edit your message. or to the required alias or ID and press to select. or to Manual Dial, and press to select. The first line of the display shows Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or ID and press

. The display shows Sending Message, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows Message Sent. to move one space to the left. Press key to move one space to the right. key to delete any unwanted Press the Press the characters. Long press method. to change text entry or 3 Press once message is composed. 4 Depending on whether you want to send, save, re-

edit, or delete the newly composed message, do one of the following. 249 English A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e or message. to Send, and press to send the or to Save, and press message to the Drafts folder. to save the to edit the message. again to choose between deleting the message or saving it to the Drafts folder. 5 If you are sending the message, select the recipient by or to the required alias or ID and press to select. or to Manual Dial, and press to select. The first line of the display shows Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or ID and press

. The display shows Sending Message, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows Message Sent. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Message Send Failed. Managing Sent Text Messages Once a message is sent to another radio, it is saved in Sent Items. The most recent sent text message is always added to the top of the Sent Items list. The Sent Items folder is capable of storing a maximum of thirty (30) last sent messages. When the folder is full, the next sent text message automatically replaces the oldest text message in the folder. Note:

Long press Home screen. at any time to return to the Viewing a Sent Text Message 1 Access the Text Message feature. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 250 English Radio Controls Program-

med Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Mes-

sage button. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Messages and press to select. Sending a Sent Text Message You can select one of the following options while viewing a sent text message:

Resend Forward Edit Delete 1 2 Press again while viewing the message. or to one of the following options and 2 3 or select. to Sent Items and press to or to the required message and press to select. The icon at the top right corner of the screen indicates the status of the message (see Sent Item Icons on page 194). press Option Forward Edit to select. Steps Select Forward to send the selected text message to another subscriber/

group alias or ID (see Forwarding a Text Message on page 249). Select Edit to edit the selected text message before sending it (see Ed-

iting a Text Message on page 249). A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 251 English Steps Select Delete to delete the text message. Select Resend to resend the select-

ed text message to the same sub-

scriber/group alias or ID. The display shows Sending Mes sage, confirming that the same mes-

sage is being sent to the same tar-

get radio. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows Message Sent. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Message Send Failed. If the message fails to send, the ra-

dio returns you to the Resend option screen. Press to resend the message to the same subscriber/

group alias or ID. Option Steps Note:

If you exit the message sending screen while the message is being sent, the radio updates the status of the message in the Sent Items folder without provid-

ing any indication in the dis-

play or via sound. Note:

If the radio changes mode or powers down before the sta-

tus of the message in Sent Items is updated, the radio cannot complete any In-

Progress messages and au-

tomatically marks it with a Send Failed icon. Note:

The radio supports a maxi-

mum of five (5) In-Progress messages at one time. Dur-

ing this period, the radio Option Delete Resend e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 252 English Option Steps cannot send any new mes-

sage and automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon. If you exit the message sending screen while the message is being sent, the radio updates the status of the message in the Sent Items folder without providing any indication in the display or via sound. If the radio changes mode or powers down before the status of the message in Sent Items is updated, the radio cannot complete any In-

Progress messages and automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon. The radio supports a maximum of five (5) In-

Progress messages at one time. During this period, the radio cannot send any new message and automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon. Deleting All Sent Text Messages from Sent Items 1 Access the Text Message feature by performing one of the following actions:

2 3 Radio Con-

trols Programmed Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Messages and press to select. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t to to Sent Items and press or select. When you select Sent Items and it contains no text messages, the display shows List Empty, and sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on (see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page 152). l P u s M o d e or select. to Delete All and press to 253 English 4 Choose one of the following. 2 Do one of the following:

or to Yes and press to select. The display shows positive mini notice. or to No and press previous screen. to return to the Receiving a Text Message When your radio receives a message, the display shows the Notification List with the alias or ID of the sender and the Message icon. You can select one of the following options when receiving a text message:

Read Read Later Delete Reading a Text Message 1 or to Read? and press to select. Selected message in the Inbox opens. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 254 English Press to return to the Inbox. Press delete the text message. a second time to reply, forward, or Managing Received Text Messages Use the Inbox to manage your text messages. The Inbox is capable of storing a maximum of 30 messages. Text messages in the Inbox are sorted according to the most recently received. Your radio supports the following options for text messages:

Reply Forward Delete Delete All Note:

If the channel type is not a match, you can only forward, delete, or delete all Received messages. Long press Home screen. at any time to return to the Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Messages and press to select. or or to Inbox and press to select. toview the messages. Replying to a Text Message from the Inbox 1 Access the Text Message feature. Radio Controls Program-

med Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Mes-

sage button. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Messages and press to select. 5 Do one of the following:

Press to select the current message, and press that message. again to reply, forward, or delete Long press to return to the Home screen. 2 3 4 or or to Inbox and press to select. to the required message and press to select. Press once more to access the sub-menu. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 255 English 5 Do one of the following:

or to Reply and press to select. or select. to Quick Reply and press to A blinking cursor appears. 6 Use your keypad to write/edit your message. 7 once message is composed. Press The display shows Sending Message, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows Message Sent. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Message Send Failed. If the message cannot be sent, the radio returns you to the Resend option screen (see Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages on page 248). e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 256 English Deleting a Text Message from the Inbox 1 Access the Text Message feature by performing Steps one of the following actions:

Radio Con-

trols Programmed Text Message button Menu Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Messages and press to select. 2 3 4 or or to Inbox and press to select. to the required message and press to select. Press once more to access the sub-menu. 5 6 or to Delete and press to select. or to Yes and press to select. The display shows Message Deleted, and the screen returns to the Inbox. Deleting All Text Messages from the Inbox 1 Access the Text Message feature by performing Steps one of the following actions:

Radio Con-

trols Programmed Text Message button Menu Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Messages and press to select. 2 or to Inbox and press to select. When you select Inbox and it contains no text messages, the display shows List Empty, and sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on

(see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page 152). A d v a n c e d F e a t or select. to Delete All and press to or to Yes and press to select. The display shows Inbox Cleared. u r e s i n C o n n e c t 3 4 Privacy If enabled, this feature helps to prevent eavesdropping by unauthorized users on a channel by the use of a software-based scrambling solution. The signaling and user identification portions of a transmission are not scrambled. Your radio must have privacy enabled on the current channel selector position to send a privacy-enabled transmission, although this is not a necessary requirement for receiving a transmission. While on a privacy-enabled channel selector position, the radio is l P u s M o d e 257 English still able to receive clear (unscrambled) transmissions. Your radio supports Enhanced Privacy. To unscramble a privacy-enabled call transmission, your radio must be programmed to have the same Key Value and Key ID (for Enhanced Privacy) as the transmitting radio. If your radio receives a scrambled call that is of a different Key Value and Key ID, you hear nothing at all (Enhanced Privacy). If the radio has a privacy type assigned, the Home screen shows the Secure or Unsecure icon, except when the radio is sending or receiving an Emergency call or alarm. The LED lights up solid green while the radio is transmitting and blinks green rapidly when the radio is receiving an ongoing privacy-enabled transmission. You can access this feature by performing one of the following actions:

Pressing the programmed Privacy button to toggle privacy on or off. Using the Radio Menu as described by the steps described next. 1 2 3 4 Note:

Some radio models may not offer this Privacy feature. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. to access the menu. or or to Utilities and press to select. to Radio Settings or or to Connect Plus and press to select. or to Enhanced Privacy. If the display shows Turn On, press enable Privacy. The radio displays a message confirming your selection. to If the display shows Turn Off, press disable Privacy. The radio displays a message confirming your selection. If the radio has a privacy type assigned, the secure or unsecure icon appears on the status to e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 258 English bar, except when the radio is sending or receiving an Emergency Alert. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Making a Privacy-Enabled (Scrambled) Call Toggle privacy on using the programmed privacy button or by using the menu. Your radio must have the Privacy feature enabled for the currently selected channel position to send a privacy-enabled transmission. When privacy is enabled for the currently selected channel position, all voice transmissions made by your radio will be scrambled. This includes Group Call, Multigroup Call, talk-back during scanned calls, Site All Call, Emergency Call, and Private Call. Only receiving radios with the same Key Value and Key ID as your radio will be able to unscramble the transmission. Security You can enable or disable any radio in the system. For example, you might want to disable a stolen radio, to prevent the thief from using it, and enable that radio, when it is recovered. Note:

Performing Radio Disable and Enable is limited to radios with these functions enabled. Radio Disable 1 Access this feature by Radio Controls Radio Dis-

able but-

ton Radio menu Steps 1 Press the programmed Radio Disable button. 2 1 2 or to the required alias or ID and press to select. to access the menu. or to Contacts and A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e press are alphabetically sorted. to select. The entries 3 Use one of the steps described next to select the required sub-

scriber alias or ID:

259 English Radio Controls Steps Radio Controls Steps Select the required alias or ID directly. or to the required alias or ID and press to select. Use the Manual Dial menu to Manual Di or al and press lect. to se-

or to Radio Num ber and press lect. to se-

The first line of the display shows Radio Number:. The second line of the dis-

play shows a blinking cur-

e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 260 English sor. Use the keypad to en-

ter the subscriber alias or ID and press

. or to Radio Disable 4 and press to select. The display shows Radio Disable: <Target Alias or ID> and the LED blinks green. 2 Wait for acknowledgement. If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the display shows Radio Disable Successful. If not successful, a negative indicator tone sounds and the display shows Radio Disable Failed. Radio Enable 1 Access this feature by Radio Con-

trols Radio Enable button Radio menu Steps Steps Radio Con-

trols 1 Press the programmed Radio Ena-

ble button. 2 1 2 or to the required alias or ID and press to select. to access the menu. or to Contacts and press to select. The entries are al-

phabetically sorted. 3 Use one of the steps described next to select the required subscriber alias or ID Select the required alias or ID di-

rectly. or to the required alias or ID and press select. to Use the Manual Dial menu or to Manual Dial and press to select. or to Radio Number and press to select. The first line of the display shows Radio Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to enter the sub-

scriber alias or ID and press A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e

. 261 English Steps Radio Con-

trols 4 or to Radio Enable and press to select. The display shows Radio Enable: <Subscriber Alias or ID> and the LED lights up solid green. 2 Wait for acknowledgement. If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the display shows Radio Enable Successful. If not successful, a negative indicator tone sounds and the display shows Radio Enable Failed. Password Lock Features If enabled, this feature only allows you access your radio if the correct password is entered upon powering up. Accessing the Radio from Password e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 262 1 Power up the radio. English The radio sounds a continuous tone. 2 Do one of the following:

Enter your current four-digit password with the

. Press radios keypad. The display shows to proceed. Enter your current four-digit password. Press to edit each digits numeric value. to move to Each digit changes to

. Press or next digit. Press to confirm your selection. on the to remove each when the line is empty, or if You hear a positive indicator tone for every digit entered. Press display. The radio sounds a negative indicator tone, if you press you press more than four digits. If the password is correct, the radio proceeds to power up. See Powering Up the Radio on page 27. If the password is incorrect, the display shows Wrong Password. Repeat Step 2. After the third incorrect password, the display shows Wrong Password and then, shows Radio Locked. A tone sounds and the LED double blinks yellow. 6 Note:

The radio is unable to receive any call, including emergency calls, in locked state. Turning the Password Lock On or Off to access the menu. to proceed. Press If the password is incorrect, the display shows Wrong Password, and automatically returns to the previous menu. A d v a n c e d F e a t 7 If the password entered in the previous step is to enable/disable password correct, press lock. The display shows The beside Enabled. disappears from beside Enabled. or to Utilities and press to select. Unlocking the Radio from Locked State to Radio Settings and press to 1 If your radio was powered down after being in the locked state, power up the radio. A tone sounds and the LED double blinks yellow. The display shows Radio Locked. to Passwd Lock and press to 2 Wait for 15 minutes. 1 2 3 4 or select. or select. u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 5 Enter the four-digit password. See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password on page 262. Your radio restarts the 15 minutes timer for locked state when you power up. 263 English or to Utilities and press to select. 8 Enter a new four-digit password. 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password on page 262. Changing the Password to access the menu. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Passwd Lock and press to 5 Enter the four-digit password. See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password on page 262. 6 Press to proceed. 1 2 3 4 e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 264 English If the password is incorrect, the display shows Wrong Password, and automatically returns to the previous menu. 7 If the password entered in the previous step is correct, to select. or to Change Pwd and press See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password on page 262. 9 Reenter the previously entered four-digit password. See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password on page 262. 10 to proceed. Press If the reentered password matches the new password entered earlier, the display shows Password Changed. If the reentered password does NOT match the new password entered earlier, the display shows Passwords Do Not Match. The screen automatically returns to the previous menu. Bluetooth Operation Note:

If disabled via the CPS, all Bluetooth-related features are disabled and the Bluetooth device database is erased. This feature allows you to use your radio with a Bluetooth-enabled device (accessory) via a wireless Bluetooth connection. Your radio supports both Motorola and COTS (Commercially available Off-The-

Shelf) Bluetooth-enabled devices. Bluetooth operates within a range of 10 meters (32 feet) line of sight. This is an unobstructed path between your radio and your Bluetooth-enabled device. It is not recommended that you leave your radio behind and expect your Bluetooth-enabled device to work with a high degree of reliability when they are separated. At the fringe areas of reception, both voice and tone quality will start to sound garbled or broken. To correct this problem, simply position your radio and Bluetooth-enabled device closer to each other (within the 10-meter/32 feet defined range) to re-establish clear audio reception. Your radios Bluetooth function has a maximum power of 2.5 mW (4 dBm) at the 10-

meter/32 feet range. Your radio can support up to 4 simultaneous Bluetooth connections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of unique types. For example, a headset, and a PTT-Only Device (POD). Multiple connections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of the same type are not supported. Refer to your respective Bluetooth-enabled devices user manual for more details on your Bluetooth-

enabled devices full capabilities. Turning Bluetooth On and Off A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Bluetooth and press to select. or to My Status and press to select. 265 English The display shows On and Off. The current status is indicated by a

. 4 Do one of the following:

3 4 e d o M s u P l or to On and press display shows On and a selected status. to select. The appears left of the or to Off and press display shows Off and a selected status. to select. The appears left of the Finding and Connecting to a Bluetooth Device Do not turn off your Bluetooth-enabled device or press operation as this cancels the operation. during the finding and connecting 1 Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and place it in pairing mode. Refer to respective Bluetooth-

enabled devices user manual. On your radio, press to access the menu. t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 2 266 English or to Bluetooth and press to select. or to Devices and press to select. 5 Do one of the following:

or to the required device and press to select. or to Find Devices to locate available devices. or to the required device and press to select. 6 or to Connect and press to select. Display shows Connecting to <Device>. Your Bluetooth-enabled device may require additional steps to complete the pairing. Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled devices user manual. If successful, the radio display shows

<Device>Connected. A tone sounds and besides the connected device. The Bluetooth Connected icon appears on the status bar. appears If unsuccessful, the radio display shows Connecting Failed. Note:

If pin code is required, use the same entry method as Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password on page 262. Finding and Connecting from a Bluetooth Device

(Discoverable Mode) Do not turn off your Bluetooth or your radio during the finding and connecting operation as this may cancel the operation. 1 Turn Bluetooth On. See Turning Bluetooth On and Off on page 141. 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Bluetooth and press to select. or to Find Me and press to select. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t Your radio can now be found by other Bluetooth-

enabled devices for a programmed duration. This is called Discoverable Mode. 5 Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and pair it with your radio. Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled devices user manual. Disconnecting from a Bluetooth Device 1 2 3 4 5 On your radio, press to access the menu. or to Bluetooth and press to select. or to Devices and press to select. l P u s M o d e or to select. or select. to the required device and press to Disconnect and press to 267 English Display shows Disconnecting from <Device>. Your Bluetooth-enabled device may require additional steps to disconnect. Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled devices user manual. The radio display shows <Device> Disconnected. A positive indicator tone sounds and beside the connected device. The Bluetooth Connected icon disappears on the status bar. disappears Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speaker and Bluetooth Device e d o M s u P l 2 3 4 5 t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A You can toggle audio routing between internal radio speaker and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory. Press the programmed Bluetooth Audio Switch button. A tone sounds and display shows Route Audio to Radio. A tone sounds and display shows Route Audio to Bluetooth. Viewing Device Details to access the menu. 1 268 English or to Bluetooth and press to select. or to Devices and press to select. or to select. or select. to the required device and press to View Details and press to Editing Device Name You can edit the name of available Bluetooth-enabled devices. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Bluetooth and press to select. or to Devices and press to select. 4 5 6 or to select. to the required device and press or to Edit Name and press to select. to move one space to the left. Press Press move one space to the right. Press any unwanted characters. Long press change text entry method. A blinking cursor appears. Use the keypad to type the required zone. to to delete to 7 The display shows Device Name Saved. Deleting Device Name You can remove a disconnected device from the list of Bluetooth-enabled devices. 1 to access the menu. 2 3 4 5 or to Bluetooth and press to select. or to Devices and press to select. or to select. to the required device and press or to Delete and press to select. The display shows Device Deleted. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t Bluetooth Mic Gain Allows control of the connected Bluetooth-enabled devices microphone gain value. l P u s M o d e 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Bluetooth and press to select. or select. to BT Mic Gain and press to 269 English to the BT Mic Gain type and the current Notification List or values. 4 5 To edit values, press to select. or to increase or to decrease values and press to select. Permanent Bluetooth Discoverable Mode Note:

The Permanent Bluetooth Discoverable Mode can only be enabled via the MOTOTRBO CPS. If enabled, the Bluetooth item will not be displayed in the Menu and you will not be able to use any Bluetooth programmable button features. Other Bluetooth-enabled devices can locate your radio, but the devices cannot connect to the radio. It enables dedicated devices to use your radio position in the process of Bluetooth-based location. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 270 English Your radio has a Notification List that collects all your unread events on the channel, such as unread text messages, missed calls, and call alerts. The Notification icon appears on the status bar when the Notification List has one or more events. The list supports a maximum of forty (40) unread events. When it is full, the next event automatically replaces the oldest event. Note:

After the events are read, they are removed from the Notification List. Accessing the Notification List 1 2 3 to access the menu. or select. or select. to Notification and press to to the required event and press to Long press to return to the Home Screen. Wi-Fi Operation Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance. Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e only. This feature allows you to setup and connect to a Wi-

Fi network. Wi-Fi supports updates for radio firmware, codeplug, and resources such as language packs and voice announcement. Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e only. The programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button is assigned via CPS. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. You can turn on or turn off Wi-Fi by performing one of the following actions. Press the programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button. Voice Announcement sounds Turning On Wi-Fi or Turning Off Wi-Fi. Access this feature via the menu. a) Press to access the menu. b) Press select. c) Press or or to select. to WiFi and press to to WiFi Status and press Press to turn on Wi-Fi. The display shows beside Enabled. Press from beside Enabled. to turn off Wi-Fi. The disappears Connecting to a Network Access Point Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e only. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 271 English When you turn on Wi-Fi, the radio scans and connects to a network access point. You can also connect to a network access point via the menu. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press or to WiFi and press to select. Press select. or to Networks and press to 4 Press or to a network access point and press to select. 5 6 Press select. or to Connect and press to Enter the password and press

. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 272 English When the connection is successful, the radio displays a notice and the network access point is saved into the profile list. Refreshing the Network List Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e only. Perform the following actions to refresh the network list. a) Press to access the menu. b) c) Press select. or to WiFi and press to or to Networks and press Press to select. When you enter the Networks menu, the radio automatically refreshes the network list. If you are already in the Networks menu, perform the following action to refresh the network list. a) Press select. or to Refresh and press to The radio refreshes and displays the latest network list. Adding a Network Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e only. If a preferred network is not in the available network list, perform the following actions to add a network. 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press or to WiFi and press to select. Press select. Press to select. or to Networks and press to or to Add Network and press 5 Enter the Service Set Identifier (SSID) and press

. 6 7 Press or to Open and press to select. Enter the password and press

. The radio displays network is successfully saved. to indicate that the Viewing Details of Network Access Points Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e only. Perform the following actions to view details of network access points. 1 2 Press to access the menu. Press or to WiFi and press to select. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 273 English 3 Press select. or to Networks and press to Perform the following actions to remove network access points from the profile list. e d o M s u P l 5 4 Press or to a network access point and press to select. or to View Details and press Press to select. For a connected network access point, the Service Set Identifier (SSID), Security Mode, Media Access Control (MAC) address, and Internet Protocol (IP) address are displayed. For a non-connected network access point, the Service Set Identifier (SSID) and Security Mode are displayed. Removing Network Access Points Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e only. Enterprise network access points that are added via CPS can only be removed via CPS. t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 274 English 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press or to WiFi and press to select. Press select. or to Networks and press to 4 Press or to the selected network access point and press to select. 5 6 Press select. or to Remove and press to Press or to Yes and press to select. The radio displays selected network access point is successfully removed. to indicate that the Utilities Turning the Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off You can enable and disable all radio tones and alerts

(except for the incoming Emergency alert tone) if needed. Press the programmed All Tones/Alerts button to toggle all tones on or off, or follow the procedure described next to access this feature via the radio menu. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Tones/Alerts and press to 5 6 or to All Tones and press to select. to enable/disable all tones and alerts. Press The display shows The beside Enabled. disappears from beside Enabled. Turning Keypad Tones On or Off You can enable and disable keypad tones if needed. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Tones/Alerts and press to A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 275 English 5 6 e d o M s u P l or select. to Keypad Tones and press to You can also use option. or to change the selected to enable/disable keypad tones. beside Enabled. Press The display shows The disappears from beside Enabled. Setting the Tone Alert Volume Offset Level You can adjust the Tone Alert Volume Offset level if needed. This feature adjusts the volume of the tones/

alerts, allowing it to be higher or lower than the voice volume. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 3 4 5 6 or select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Tones/Alerts and press to to Vol. Offset and press to or to the required volume value. The radio sounds a feedback tone with each corresponding volume value. 7 Do one of the following:

Press volume value. to keep the required displayed Press volume offset settings. to exit without changing the current 276 English Turning the Talk Permit Tone On or Off 6 You can enable and disable the Talk Permit Tone if needed. 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Tones/Alerts and press to to Talk Permit and press to You can also use option. or to change the selected A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e to enable/disable the Talk Permit Press Tone. The display shows The beside Enabled. disappears from beside Enabled. Turning the Power Up Alert Tone On or Off You can enable and disable the Power Up Alert Tone if needed. to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Tones/Alerts and press to 1 2 3 4 5 or to Power Up and press to select. 277 English You can also use option. or to change the selected 2 Press select. or to Utilities and press to 6 1 to enable/disable the Power Up Alert Press Tone. The display shows The beside Enabled. disappears from beside Enabled. Setting the Power Level You can customize your radios power setting to high or low for each Connect Plus zone. High enables communication with tower sites in Connect Plus mode located at a considerable distance from you. Low enables communication with tower sites in Connect Plus mode in closer proximity. Press the programmed Power Level button to toggle transmit power level between high and low. Follow the procedure described next to access this feature via the radio menu. Press to access the menu. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 278 English 3 Press or to Radio Settings and press to select. 4 Press select. or to Power and press to 5 Press or to the required setting and press to select. appears beside selected setting. At any time, long press Screen returns to the previous menu. to return to the Home screen. Changing the Display Mode You can change radios display mode between Day or Night, as needed. This affects the color palette of the display. 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to or to select. The display shows Day Mode and Night Mode. to Display and press Note:

or to change the selected option. or to enable. to the required setting and press appears besides selected setting. Adjusting the Display Brightness You can adjust the display brightness of the radio as needed. Note:

Display brightness cannot be adjusted when Auto Brightness is enabled. to access the menu. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to or to Display and press to select. to Brightness and press or select. The display shows a progress bar. to Decrease display brightness by pressing increase the display brightness by pressing or

. 1 2 3 4 5 6 279 English Select from setting of 1 to 8. Press your entry. to confirm Setting the Display Backlight Timer You can set the the radios display backlight timer as needed. The setting also affects the Menu Navigation Buttons and keypad backlighting accordingly. Press the programmed Backlight button to toggle the backlight settings, or follow the procedure described next to access this feature via the radio menu. The display backlight and keypad backlighting are automatically turned off if the LED indicator is disabled (see Turning the LED Indicator On or Off on page 162). 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 280 English 4 5 or to Display and press to select. or select. to Backlight Timer and press to You can use option. or to change the selected Turning the Introduction Screen On or Off You can enable and disable the Introduction Screen if needed. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to or to Display and press to select. 5 6 or select. to Intro Screen and press to You can also use option. or to change the selected to enable/disable the Introduction Press Screen. The display shows The beside Enabled. disappears from beside Enabled. Locking and Unlocking the Keypad You can lock your radios keypad to avoid inadvertent key entry. Steps To lock/unlock your radios keypad. Option Locking the Key-

pad 1 to access the menu. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e Option Steps 2 3 4 or to Utilities and press or to select. to Radio Settings and press to select. or to Keypad Lock and to select. press You can also use or to change the selected option. Unlocking the Key-

pad Press followed by

. After the keypad is locked, the display shows Keypad Locked and returns to the Home screen. After the keypad is unlocked, the display shows Keypad Unlocked and returns to the Home screen. 281 English Language Turning the LED Indicator On or Off You can set your radio display to be in your required language. You can enable and disable the LED Indicator if needed. 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to or to Languages and press to select. You can also use option. or to change selected or to the required language and press to enable. language. appears beside selected 1 2 3 4 5 e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 282 English to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to LED Indicator and press to You can also use option. or to change the selected to enable/disable the LED Indicator. Press The display shows The beside Enabled. disappears from beside Enabled. Identifying Cable Type You can select the type of cable your radio uses. is typically useful when the user is in a difficult condition to read the content shown on the display. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Cable Type and press to You can also use option. or to change the selected 5 The current cable type is indicated by a

. Voice Announcement This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the current Zone or Channel the user has just assigned, or programmable button press. This audio indicator can be customized per customer requirements. This A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to or to Voice Announcement and press to select. You can also use option. or to change the selected 5 Do one of the following:

Press The display shows to enable Voice Announcement. beside Enabled. 283 English Press The to disable Voice Announcement. disappears from beside Enabled. Menu Timer Set the period of time your radio stays in the menu before it automatically switches to the Home screen. 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to or to Display and press to select. or select. to Menu Timer and press to e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 284 English 6 or to select. to the required setting and press Digital Mic AGC (Mic AGC-D) This feature controls the your radio's microphone gain automatically while transmitting on a digital system. It suppresses loud audio or boosts soft audio to a preset value in order to provide a consistent level of audio. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to You can also use option. or to change the selected or to Mic AGC-D and press to select. 5 Do one of the following:

Press shows to enable Mic AGC-D. The display beside Enabled. Press disappears from beside Enabled. to disable Mic AGC-D. The Radio Con-

trol Menu Intelligent Audio Your radio can automatically adjust its audio volume to overcome background noise in the environment, inclusive of all stationary and non-stationary noise sources. This feature is a Receive-only feature and does not affect Transmit audio. Note:

This feature is not applicable during a Bluetooth session. 1 to access the menu. Steps 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Radio Settings and press or press or to select. to Radio Settings and to select. to Intelligent Audio and press to select. Note:

to You can also use change the selected option. or 5 Do one of the following:

Press Audio. The display shows side Enabled. to enable Intelligent be-

A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 285 English Steps Radio Con-

trol Press Audio. The side Enabled. to disable Intelligent disappears from be-

2 3 4 or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or to select. to Radio Settings and press to to Intelligent Audio and press 5 Do one of the following:

Press display shows to enable Intelligent Audio. The beside Enabled. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 286 English Press disappears from beside Enabled. to disable Intelligent Audio. The See Authorized Accessories List on page 307 for recommended Bluetooth-enabled audio accessories with in-built Automatic Volume Control for similar performance. Turning the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Feature On or Off This feature allows you to minimize acoustic feedback in received calls. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to AF Suppressor and press to You can also use option. or to change the selected 5 Do one of the following. Press Suppressor. The display shows Enabled. to enable Acoustic Feedback beside Press Suppressor. The Enabled. to disable Acoustic Feedback disappears from beside Turning the Microphone Dynamic Distortion Control Feature On or Off This feature allows you to enable the radio to automatically monitor the microphone input and adjust the microphone gain value to avoid audio clipping. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. 3 4 or select. to Radio Settings and press to You can also use option. or to change the selected or select. to Mic Distortion and press to 5 Do one of the following:

A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t to enable Microphone Dynamic Press Distortion Control. The display shows Enabled. beside Press Distortion Control. The beside Enabled. to disable Microphone Dynamic disappears from l P u s M o d e Turning GPS/GNSS On or Off Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) is a satellite navigation system that determines the radios precise location. GNSS includes Global Positioning System (GPS), Global Navigation Satellite System 287 English

(GLONASS), and BeiDou Navigation Satellite System

(BDS). Press the programmed GPS/GNSS button to toggle the feature on or off. 5 Note:

Selected radio models may offer GPS, GLONASS, and BDS. GNSS constellation is configured via CPS. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. 1 2 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities and press to 3 Press or to Radio Settings and press to select. 4 Press or to GPS and press to select. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 288 English to enable/disable GPS/GNSS. beside Enabled. Press The display shows The disappears from beside Enabled. See Checking the GPS/GNSS Information on page 184 for details on retrieving GPS/GNSS information. Text Entry Configuration You can configure the following settings for entering text on your radio:

Word Predict Word Correct Sentence Cap My Words Your radio supports the following text entry methods:

Numbers Symbols Predictive or Multi-Tap Language (If programmed) Note:

Press at any time to return to the previous screen or long press to return to the Home Screen. The radio exits the current screen once the inactivity timer expires. Word Predict Your radio can learn common word sequences that you often enter. It then predicts the next word you may want to use after you enter the first word of a common word sequence into the text editor. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Text Entry and press to 5 or select. to Word Predict and press to You can also use option. or to change the selected 6 Do one of the following:

Press shows to enable Word Predict. The display beside Enabled. Press disappears from beside Enabled. to disable Word Predict. The Sentence Cap Automatically enables capitalization for the first letter in the first word for every new sentence. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 1 2 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. 289 English 3 4 5 or select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Text Entry and press to to Sentence Cap and press to 6 Do one of the following:

Press display shows to enable Sentence Cap. The beside Enabled. Press disappears from beside Enabled. to disable Sentence Cap. The Viewing Custom Words You can add your own custom words into your radios in-built dictionary. Your radio maintains a list to contain these words. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 290 English 1 2 3 4 5 6 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Text Entry and press to or to My Words and press to select. to List of Words and press or select. Display shows the list of custom words. to Editing Custom Word You can edit the custom words saved in your radio. 1 to access the menu. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Text Entry and press to or to My Words and press to select. to List of Words and press or select. Display shows the list of custom words. to or select. to the required word and press to or to Edit and press to select. 9 Use the keypad to edit your custom word. to move one space to the left. Press key to move one space to the right. key to delete any unwanted Press the Press the characters. Long press to change text entry or method. Press completed. once your custom word is The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your custom word is being saved. If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the custom word is not saved, a low tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. Adding Custom Word You can add your own custom words into your radios in-built dictionary. 1 to access the menu. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 291 English 2 3 4 5 6 or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Text Entry and press to or to My Words and press to select. method. Press completed. once your custom word is The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your custom word is being saved. If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the custom word is not saved, a low tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. Deleting a Custom Word You can delete the custom words saved in your radio. to Add New Word and press or select. Display shows the list of custom words. to 7 Use the keypad to edit your custom word. to move one space to the left. Press key to move one space to the right. key to delete any unwanted Press the Press the characters. Long press to change text entry 1 2 3 or to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 292 English 4 5 6 7 or select. to Text Entry and press to or to My Words and press to select. or select. to the required word and press to or to Delete and press to select. 8 Choose one of the following. At Delete Entry?, press The display shows Entry Deleted. to select Yes. or to No and press previous screen. to return to the Deleting All Custom Words You can delete all custom words from your radios in-

built. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 1 2 3 4 5 6 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. or select. to Radio Settings and press to to Text Entry and press to or to My Words and press to select. or select. to Delete All and press to 7 Choose one of the following. At Delete Entry?, press The display shows Entry Deleted. to select Yes. 293 English 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Info and press to to to Battery Info and press or select. The display shows the battery information. For IMPRES batteries ONLY: The display reads Recondition Battery if the battery requires reconditioning in an IMPRES charger. After the reconditioning process, the display then shows the battery information. or to No and press previous screen. to return to the Accessing General Radio Information Your radio contains information on the following:

Battery Degree of Tilt (Accelerometer) Radio Model Number Index Option Board Over-the-Air (OTA) Codeplug CRC Site Number Site Info Radio Alias and ID Firmware and Codeplug Versions GPS Information Press at any time to return to the previous to return to the Home screen or long press screen. The radio exits the current screen once the inactivity timer expires. Accessing the Battery Information Displays information on your radio battery. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 294 English Checking the Degree of Tilt (Accelerometer) Note:

The measurement on the display shows the 3 or select. to Radio Info and press to degree of tilt at the moment you press accept the Accelerometer option. If you change the angle of the radio after pressing to

, the radio does not change the measurement shown on its display. It continues to display the measurement taken when was pressed. If the portable radio has been enabled for the Man Down Alarms, there is a menu option to check how the radio measures the degree of tilt. This is a helpful feature when the dealer or Radio System Administrator uses the MOTOTRBO Connect Plus Option Board CPS to configure the activation angle that will trigger the tilt alarm. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 4 Tilt the radio at the angle that triggers the Tilt Alarm. 5 to to Accelerometer and press or select. The display shows the radios angle of tilt

(deviation from perpendicular vertical position) in degrees (example: 62 Deg.) Based on this, use MOTOTRBO Connect Plus Option Board CPS to configure the Activation Angle for 60 degrees

(which is the closest programmable value). The Tilt Alarm timers are triggered when the Activation Angle is 60 degrees, or greater. Checking the Radio Model Number Index This index number identifies your radios model-

specific hardware. Your radio system administrator may ask for this number when preparing a new Option Board codeplug for your radio. 295 English to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Info and press to 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 to Model Index and press or select. The display shows the Model Number Index. to Checking the CRC of the Option Board OTA Codeplug File Follow the instructions below if your radio system administrator asks you to view the Option Board OTA Codeplug File CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check). This menu option only appears if the Option Board received its last codeplug update OTA. 1 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Info and press to to OB OTA CPcrc and press or select. The display shows some letters and numbers. Communicate this information to your radio system administrator exactly as shown. to Displaying the Site ID (Site Number) Note:

If you are not currently registered at a site, the display shows Not Registered. The radio briefly shows the Site ID as it registers with a Connect Plus site. Following registration, the radio does not generally indicate the Site number. To display the registered Site number, do the following:

1 to access the menu. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 296 English 2 3 4 or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Info and press to to Site Number and press or select. The display shows the Network ID and the Site Number. to Checking the Site Info Note:

If you are not currently registered at a site, the display shows Not Registered. The Site Info feature provides information that can be useful to a service technician. It consists of the following information:

Repeater number of current Control Channel repeater. RSSI: Last signal strength value measured from Control Channel repeater. Neighbor List sent by Control Channel repeater

(five numbers separated by commas). If you are requested to use this feature, please report the displayed information exactly as it appears on the screen. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Info and press to or to Site Info and press The display shows the Site Info. to select. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e Checking the Radio ID This feature displays the ID of your radio. Follow the procedure described next to access this feature via the radio screen. 297 English to access the menu. 4 or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Info and press to or to My ID and press The display shows the radio ID. to select. Checking the Firmware Version and Codeplug Version Displays the firmware version on your radio. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Info and press to or to Versions and press to select.

(Radio) Firmware Version

(Radio) Codeplug Version The display a list with the following information:

Option Board Firmware Version Option Board Frequency Version Option Board Hardware Version Option Board Codeplug Version Checking for Updates Connect Plus provides the ability to update certain files (Option Board Codeplug, Network Frequency File and Option Board Firmware File) over-the-air. Note:

Check with the dealer or network administrator to determine whether this feature has been enabled for your radio. Any display Connect Plus radio has the ability to show its current Option Board OTA Codeplug CRC, Frequency File version or Option Board firmware file version via a menu option. In addition, display radios that have been enabled for over-the-air file transfer can display the version of a "pending file". A "pending 1 2 3 4 e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 298 English file" is a Frequency File or Option Board firmware file that the Connect Plus radio knows about via system messaging, but the radio has not yet collected all of the files packets. If a display Connect Plus radio has a pending file, the menu provides options to:

See the version number of the pending file. See what percentage of packets has been collected so far. Request the Connect Plus radio to resume collecting file packets. If the radio is enabled for Connect Plus over-the-air file transfer, there may be times when the radio automatically joins a file transfer without first notifying the radio user. While the radio is collecting file packets, the LED rapidly blinks red and the radio displays the High Volume Data icon on the Home Screen status bar. Note:

The Connect Plus radio cannot collect file packets and receive calls at the same time. If you wish to cancel the file transfer, press and release the PTT button. This causes the radio to request a call on the selected Contact Name, and it will also cancel the file transfer for that radio until the process resumes at a later time. There are several things that can make the file transfer process start again. The first example applies to all over-the-air file types. The other examples apply only to the Network Frequency File and Option Board Firmware File:

The radio system administrator re-initiates the over-the-air file transfer. The Option Board's pre-defined timer expires, which causes the Option Board to automatically resume the process of collecting packets. The timer has not yet expired, but the radio user requests the file transfer to resume via the menu option. After the Connect Plus radio finishes downloading all file packets, it must upgrade to the newly acquired file. For the Network Frequency File, this is an automatic process and does not require a radio reset. For the Option Board Codeplug File, this is an automatic process that will cause a brief interruption to service as the Option Board loads the new codeplug information and re-acquires a network site. How quickly the radio upgrades to a new Option Board firmware file depends on how the radio has A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 299 English been configured by the dealer or system administrator. The radio will either upgrade immediately after collecting all file packets, or it will wait until the next time that the user turns the radio on. Note:

Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. The process of upgrading to a new Option Board firmware file takes several seconds, and it requires the Connect Plus Option Board to reset the radio. Once the upgrade starts, the radio use will not be able to make or receive calls until the process is completed. Firmware File Firmware Up to Date Note:

If the Option Board firmware file is not Up to Date (and if the radio has partially collected a more recent Option Board firmware file version) the radio displays a list with additional options; Version, %Received, and Download. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 300 English 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Info and press to or to Updates and press to select. or to Firmware and press to select. The display shows Firmware is Up to Date. Pending Firmware Version 1 2 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. 3 4 5 6 or select. to Radio Info and press to or to Updates and press to select. or to Firmware and press to select. or to Version and press to select. If there is a pending Option Board firmware file, the display shows the pending firmware version number. If there is a pending Option Board firmware file, the display shows Firmware is Up to Date. Pending Firmware % Received 1 2 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. 3 4 5 6 or select. to Radio Info and press to or to Updates and press to select. or to Firmware and press to select. or to %Received and press to select. The screen displays the percentage of firmware file packets collected so far. Note:

When at 100%, the radio needs to be power cycled Off and then On to initiate the firmware upgrade. Pending Firmware Download If the Connect Plus radio has previously left an OTA Option Board Firmware File Transfer with a partial file, the unit automatically rejoins the file transfer (if still ongoing) when an internal timer expires. If you want the unit to rejoin an ongoing Option Board Firmware File transfer prior to expiration of this A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 301 English internal timer, use the Download option as described below. to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Info and press to or to Updates and press to select. or to Firmware and press to select. or to Download and press The display shows the following:

to select. Download Available No Download Availa-

ble Start Download Download not availa ble 1 2 3 4 5 6 e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 302 English 7 Do one of the following:

Select Yes and press download. to start the Select No and press previous menu. to return to the Frequency File Frequency File Up to Date Note:

If the Frequency File is not Up to Date (and if the radio has partially collected a more recent frequency file version) the radio displays a list with additional options; Version, %Received, and Download. to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. 1 2 or select. to Radio Info and press to If there is a pending Frequency File, the display shows the pending Frequency File version number. Frequency File Pending % Received 3 4 or to select. The display shows Freq. File is Up to Date. to Frequency and press Frequency File Pending Version 1 2 3 4 5 6 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Info and press to or to Updates and press to select. or to Frequency and press to select. or to Version and press to select. 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Info and press to or to Updates and press to select. or to %Received and press to select. The screen displays the percentage of frequency file packets collected so far. Frequency File Pending Download If the Connect Plus radio has previously left an OTA Network Frequency File Transfer with a partial file, A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 303 English the unit automatically rejoins the file transfer (if still ongoing) when an internal timer expires. If you want the unit to rejoin an ongoing Network Frequency File transfer prior to expiration of this internal timer, use the Download option as described below. to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Info and press to or to Updates and press to select. or to Frequency and press to select. or to Download and press to select. Download Currently Unavailable Download not avail able 1 2 3 4 5 6 e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 304 English Download Currently Available Start Download 7 Do one of the following:

Select Yes and press to start the download. Select No and press to return to the previous menu. Checking the GPS/GNSS Information Displays the GPS/GNSS information on your radio, such as values of:

Latitude Longitude Altitude Direction Velocity Horizontal Dilution of Precision (HDOP) Satellites Version 1 to access the menu. 2 3 4 5 or to Utilities and press to select. or select. to Radio Info and press to or to GPS Info and press to select. to the required item and press or select. The display shows the requested GPS/GNSS information. to See Turning GPS/GNSS On or Off on page 172 for details on GPS/GNSS. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 305 English Accessories s e i r o s s e c c A 306 English Authorized Accessories List Antennas UHF, 403 527MHz, Whip Antenna

(PMAE4068_)[7]

UHF, 403 527MHz, Slim Whip Antenna

(PMAE4079_)[7]

UHF, 403 450MHz, Stubby Antenna

(PMAE4069_)[7]

UHF, 440 490MHz, Stubby Antenna

(PMAE4070_[7]

UHF, 470 527MHz, Stubby Antenna

(PMAE4071_)[7]

UHF, 470 527MHz, Stubby Antenna

(PMAE4071_)[7]

VHF, 144 165MHz, Helical Antenna

(PMAD4116_)[7]

VHF, 136 155MHz, Helical Antenna

(PMAD4117_)[7]

VHF, 152 174MHz, Helical Antenna

(PMAD4118_)[7]

7 Applicable to XPR7550 only. 8 Applicable to XPR7580 only. VHF, 136 148MHz, Stubby Antenna

(PMAD4119_)[7]

VHF, 146 160MHz, Stubby Antenna

(PMAD4120_)[7]

VHF, 160 174MHz, Stubby Antenna

(PMAD4121)[7]

800/900, 806 870MHz, Whip Antenna

(PMAF4011_)[8]

800/900, 896 941MHz, Whip Antenna

(PMAF4012_)[8]

800/900, 806 870MHz, Short Whip Antenna

(PMAF4009_) 800/900, 896 941MHz, Short Whip Antenna

(PMAF4010_) A u t h o r i z e d A c c e s s o r i e s i L s t Batteries Core NiMH, 1300 mAh Battery (PMNN4412_) Core Slim Li-Ion, 1500 mAh Battery

(PMNN4406_R) 307 English IMPRES Li-Ion, 1500 mAh Slim Battery

(PMNN4407_R) IMPRES Hi-Capacity Li-Ion, 2150 mAh Battery

(PMNN4409_R) IMPRES Hi-Capacity Li-Ion, 2300 mAh Battery

(FM) (NNTN8129_) IMPRES Li-Ion, 2700 mAh Battery

(PMNN4448_R) IMPRES Li-Ion, 2900 mAh TIA4950 HAZLOC IP68 Battery(PMNN4489_)[9]

IMPRES Hi-Capacity Li-Ion, 2500 mAh TIA4950 Submersible IP57 Battery, Intrinsically Safe

(NNTN8560_) IMPRES Slim Li-Ion, 2100 mAh IP68 Battery

(PMNN4491_) IMPRES Li-Ion, 3000 mAh IP68 Battery, low voltage (PMNN4493_) IMPRES Li-Ion, 3000 mAh IP68 Battery

(PMNN4488_) Carry Devices 2.5-Inch Replacement Leather Swivel Belt Loop

(PMLN5610_) 3-Inch Replacement Leather Swivel Belt Loop

(PMLN5611_) Hard Leather Carry Case with 3-Inch Fixed Belt Loop for Full-Keypad Radio (PMLN5838_) Hard Leather Carry Case with 3-Inch Swivel Belt Loop for Full-Keypad Radio (PMLN5840_) Hard Leather Carry Case with 2.5-Inch Swivel Belt Loop for Full-Keypad and Limited-Keypad Radio

(PMLN5842_) Nylon Carry Case with 3-Inch Fixed Belt Loop for Full-Keypad and Limited-Keypad Radio

(PMLN5844_) Belt Clip for 2-Inch Belt Width (PMLN4651_) Belt Clip for 2.5-Inch Belt Width (PMLN7008_) Vibrating Belt Clip for 2.5-Inch Belt Width

(PMLN7296_) Chargers IMPRES Multi-Unit Charger (WPLN4212_) t s L i s e i r o s s e c c A d e z i r o h t u A 308 9 Applicable to XPR 7550e/XPR 7580e only. English IMPRES Multi-Unit Charger with Display

(WPLN4219_) IMPRES Single-Unit Charger (WPLN4232_) Core Single Unit Charger (NNTN8117_) IMPRES Vehicular Charger (NNTN7616_) IMPRES Battery Reader (NNTN7392_) Earbuds and Earpieces Receive-Only Earbud (AARLN4885_) Receive-Only Earbud (MDRLN4885) D-Shell Receive-Only Earpiece (PMLN4620_) Receive-Only Earpiece (RLN4941_) Standard Earpiece, Black (RLN6279_) Standard Earpiece, Beige (RLN6280_) Earpiece with Acoustic Tube Assembly, Beige

(RLN6284_) Earpiece with Acoustic Tube Assembly, Black

(RLN6285_) Earpiece with High Noise Kit, Beige (RLN6288_) Earpiece with High Noise Kit, Black (RLN6289_) 1-Wire Earbud, 29cm Cord, Black (NNTN8294_) 1-Wire Earbud,116cm Cord, Black (NNTN8295_) Over-the-Ear Receiver for Remote Speaker Microphone (WADN4190_) D-Shell Earset (PMLN5096_) IMPRES Temple Transducer with In-line Push-to-

Talk (PMLN5101_) Replacement Foam Ear Pad and Windscreen

(RLN6283_) Replacement Ear Seal Cloth Cover (1580376E32) Replacement Boom Mic Windscreen

(5080548E02) Replacement Windscreen O-Ring (3280376E35) Wireless Earpiece Maintenance Kit (NTN8821_) Replacement Ear Tips Kit for Wireless Ear Buds

(NNTN8316_) Replacement Ear Tubes for CommPort Earpiece, Pack of 10 (RLN5037_) Ear Straps for CommPort Earpiece (for Secure Attachment to Ear), Pack of 10 (NTN8988_) A u t h o r i z e d A c c e s s o r i e s i L s t Headsets and Headset Accessories Ultra-Lite Headset (PMLN5102_) Heavy Duty Noise-Canceling Headset

(PMLN5275_) Lightweight Headset (RMN5058_) 309 English Non-Secure Wireless Headset & Push-to-Talk Device with Push-to-Talk Audio, 12-Inch Cable

(NNTN8125_) Non-Secure Wireless Headset & Push-to-Talk Device with Push-to-Talk Audio, 9.5-Inch Cable

(NNTN8126_) Non-Secure Wireless Push-to-Talk Device

(NNTN8127_) Push-to-Talk Module, without Charger

(NNTN8191_) Replacement Earpiece 12Inch Cable (for NNTN8125_)(NTN2572_) Business Wireless Accessory Kit (PMLN6463_) Remote Speaker Microphones Remote Speaker Microphone (PMMN4024_) IMPRES Remote Speaker Microphone

(PMMN4025_) Remote Speaker Microphone, Submersible (IP57)

(PMMN4040_) IMPRES Remote Speaker Microphone, with Volume, IP57 (PMMN4046_) IMPRES Remote Speaker Microphone, with Earjack, Noise-Canceling (PMMN4050_) Remote Speaker Microphone Replacement Coil Cord Kit (For Use with PMMN4024_ and PMMN4040_) (RLN6074_) Remote Speaker Microphone Replacement Coil Cord Kit (For Use with PMMN4025_, PMMN4046_, PMMN4050_) (RLN6075_) IMPRES Remote Speaker Microphone, IP57

(NNTN8382_) IMPRES Remote Speaker Microphone, with Earjack (NNTN8383_) Surveillance Accessories Receive Only Surveillance Kit, Black (Single Wire)

(PMLN6125_) Receive Only Surveillance Kit, Beige (Single Wire)

(PMLN6126_) Surveillance Low Noise Kit (RLN5886_) Surveillance High Noise Kit (RLN5887_) IMPRES 2-Wire Surveillance Kit, Black

(PMLN6127_) IMPRES 2-Wire Surveillance Kit, Beige

(PMLN6128_) IMPRES 2-Wire Surveillance Kit with Clear, Comfortable Acoustic Tube, Black (RLN5882_) t s L i s e i r o s s e c c A d e z i r o h t u A 310 English IMPRES 2-Wire Surveillance Kit with Clear, Comfortable Acoustic Tube, Black (PMLN6129_) IMPRES 2-Wire Surveillance Kit with Clear, Comfortable Acoustic Tube, Beige (PMLN6130_) IMPRES 3-Wire Surveillance, Black (PMLN5097_) IMPRES 3-Wire Surveillance, Beige (PMLN5106_) IMPRES 3Wire Surveillance with Clear, Comfortable Acoustic Tube, Black (PMLN6123_) IMPRES 3Wire Surveillance with Clear, Comfortable Acoustic Tube, Beige (PMLN6124_) Transparent Acoustic Tube (RLN6242_) Replacement Foam Plugs, Pack of 50 (For Use with RLN5886_) (RLN6281_) Replacement Ear Tips, Clear, Pack of 50 (For Use with RLN5887_) (RLN6282_) Small Custom Earpiece for Surveillance Kits, Right Ear (RLN4760_) Medium Custom Earpiece for Surveillance Kits, Right Ear (RLN4761_) Large Custom Earpiece for Surveillance Kits, Right Ear (RLN4762_) Small Custom Earpiece for Surveillance Kits, Left Ear (RLN4763_) Medium Custom Earpiece for Surveillance Kits, Left Ear (RLN4764_) A u t h o r i z e d A c c e s s o r i e s i L s t Large Custom Earpiece for Surveillance Kits, Left Ear (RLN4765_) Miscellaneous Accessories Universal Chest Pack (HLN6602_) Waterproof Bag, Includes Large Carry Strap

(HLN9985_) Shoulder Strap (Attaches to D-Ring on Carry Case) (NTN5243_) Small Clip, Epaulet Strap (RLN4295_) Break-A-Way Chest Pack (RLN4570_) Universal RadioPAK and Utility Case (Fanny Pack) (RLN4815_) Replacement Strap for RLN4570_ and HLN6602_ Chest Packs (1505596Z02) Universal RadioPAK Extension Belt (4280384F89) Belt (4200865599) Tactical Remote Body Push-to-Talk (PMLN6767_) Push-to-Talk Interface Module (PMLN6827_) Tactical Remote Ring Push-to-Talk (PMLN6830_) Tactical Heavy Duty Temple Transducer with Noise Cancelling Boom Microphone (PMLN6833_) 311 English Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range Special Channel Assignments Emergency Channel If you are in imminent and grave danger at sea and require emergency assistance, use VHF Channel 16 to send a distress call to nearby vessels and the United States Coast Guard. Transmit the following information, in this order:

1 MAYDAY, MAYDAY, MAYDAY. 2 THIS IS _____________________, CALL SIGN __________. State the name of the vessel in distress 3 times, followed by the call sign or other identification of the vessel, stated 3 times. 3 Repeat MAYDAY and the name of the vessel. 4 WE ARE LOCATED AT _______________________. State the position of the vessel in distress, using any information that will help responders to locate you, e.g.:

bearing (state whether you are using true or latitude and longitude magnetic north) e g n a R y c n e u q e r F F H V e h t n i i e s U o d a R e m i t i r a M 312 English distance to a well-known landmark vessel course, speed or destination 5 State the nature of the distress. 6 Specify what kind of assistance you need. 7 State the number of persons on board and the number needing medical attention, if any. 8 Mention any other information that would be helpful to responders, such as type of vessel, vessel length and/or tonnage, hull color, etc. 9 OVER. 10 Wait for a response. 11 If you do not receive an immediate response, remain by the radio and repeat the transmission at intervals until you receive a response. Be prepared to follow any instructions given to you. Non-Commercial Call Channel For non-commercial transmissions, such as fishing reports, rendezvous arrangements, repair scheduling, or berthing information, use VHF Channel 9. Operating Frequency Requirements A radio designated for shipboard use must comply with Federal Communications Commission Rule Part 80 as follows:

on ships subject to Part II of Title III of the Communications Act, the radio must be capable of operating on the 156.800 MHz frequency. on ships subject to the Safety Convention, the radio must be capable of operating:

in the simplex mode on the ship station transmitting frequencies specified in the 156.025 157.425 MHz frequency band, and in the semiduplex mode on the two frequency channels specified in the table below. Note:

Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US waters. Additional information about operating requirements in the Maritime Services can be obtained from the full text of FCC Rule Part 80 and from the US Coast Guard. Table 1: VHF Marine Channel List Channel Num-

ber Frequency (MHz) Transmit Receive 1 2

*

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13**

14 15**

16 17**

156.050 156.100 156.150 156.200 156.250 156.300 156.350 156.400 156.450 156.500 156.550 156.600 156.650 156.700 156.750 156.800 156.850 160.650 160.700 160.750 160.800 160.850 160.950 156.450 156.500 156.550 156.600 156.650 156.700 156.750 156.800 156.850 M a r i t i m e R a d o U s e i i n t h e V H F F r e q u e n c y R a n g e 313 English 18 19 20

*

22

*

24 25 26 27 28 60

*

62 63

*

65 156.900 156.950 157.000 157.050 157.100 157.150 157.200 157.250 157.300 157.350 157.400 156.025 156.075 156.125 156.175 156.225 156.275 161.500 161.550 161.600 161.650 161.700 161.750 161.800 161.850 161.900 161.950 162.000 160.625 160.675 160.725 160.775 160.825 160.875 66 67**

68 69 71 72 73 74 75 76 77**

78 79 80

*

*

*

156.325 156.375 156.425 156.475 156.575 156.625 156.675 156.725

***

***

156.875 156.925 156.975 157.025 157.075 157.125 157.175 160.925 156.375 156.425 156.475 156.575 156.675 156.725

***

***

161.525 161.575 161.625 161.675 161.725 161.775 e g n a R y c n e u q e r F F H V e h t n i i e s U o d a R e m i t i r a M 314 English 84 85 86 87 88 157.225 157.275 157.325 157.375 157.425 161.825 161.875 161.925 161.975 162.025 Note:

* Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US waters.

** Low power (1 W) only.

*** Guard band. Note:

A in the Receive column indicates that the channel is transmit only. Declaration of Compliance for the Use of Distress and Safety Frequencies The radio equipment does not employ a modulation other than the internationally adopted modulation for maritime use when it operates on the distress and safety frequencies specified in RSS-182 Section 7.3. M a r i t i Technical Parameters for Interfacing External Data Sources RS232 18V USB 3.6V SB9600 5V 28 kb/s 12 Mb/s 9.6 kb/s Input Volt-

age (Volts Peak-to-

peak) Max Data Rate Impedance 5000 ohm 90 ohm 120 ohm m e R a d o U s e i i n t h e V H F F r e q u e n c y R a n g e 315 English IMPRES Batteries, When Used Exclusively with IMPRES Chargers 18 Months Batteries and Chargers Warranty The Workmanship Warranty The workmanship warranty guarantees against defects in workmanship under normal use and service. All MOTOTRBO Batter-

ies IMPRES Chargers (Sin-

gle-Unit and Multi-Unit, Non-Display) IMPRES Chargers (Multi-

Unit with Display) 24 Months 24 Months 12 Months The Capacity Warranty The capacity warranty guarantees 80% of the rated capacity for the warranty duration. Nickel Metal-Hydride

(NiMH) or Lithium-Ion (Li-

lon) Batteries 12 Months y t n a r r a W s r e g r a h C d n a s e i r e t t a B 316 English Limited Warranty MOTOROLA COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW LONG:

MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, INC. (MOTOROLA) warrants the MOTOROLA manufactured Communication Products listed below (Product) against defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of time from the date of purchase as scheduled below:

XPR Series Digital Porta-

ble Radios Product Accessories (Ex-

cluding Batteries and Chargers) 36 Months 12 Months MOTOROLA, at its option, will at no charge either repair the Product (with new or reconditioned parts), replace it (with a new or reconditioned Product), or refund the purchase price of the Product during the warranty period provided it is returned in accordance with the terms of this warranty. Replaced parts or boards are warranted for the balance of the original applicable warranty period. All replaced parts of Product shall become the property of MOTOROLA. This express limited warranty is extended by MOTOROLA to the original end user purchaser only and is not assignable or transferable to any other party. This is the complete warranty for the Product manufactured by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA assumes no obligations or liability for additions or modifications to this warranty unless made in writing and signed by an officer of MOTOROLA. Unless made in a separate agreement between MOTOROLA and the original end user purchaser, MOTOROLA does not warrant the installation, maintenance or service of the Product. MOTOROLA cannot be responsible in any way for any ancillary equipment not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product, or for operation of the Product with any ancillary equipment, and all such equipment is expressly excluded from this warranty. Because each system which may use the Product is unique, MOTOROLA disclaims liability for range, coverage, or i L m i t e d W a r r a n t y 317 English operation of the system as a whole under this warranty. III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:

II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:

This warranty sets forth the full extent of MOTOROLA'S responsibilities regarding the Product. Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase price, at MOTOROLAs option, is the exclusive remedy. THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES. IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF TIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS, LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LIMITATION ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY. This warranty gives specific legal rights, and there may be other rights which may vary from state to state. IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:

You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the date of purchase and Product item serial number) in order to receive warranty service and, also, deliver or send the Product item, transportation and insurance prepaid, to an authorized warranty service location. Warranty service will be provided by MOTOROLA through one of its authorized warranty service locations. If you first contact the company which sold you the Product (e.g., dealer or communication service provider), it can facilitate your obtaining warranty service. You can also call MOTOROLA at 1-800-927-2744 US/Canada. y t n a r r a W d e t i m L i 318 English V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:

1 Defects or damage resulting from use of the Product in other than its normal and customary manner. 2 Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water, or neglect. 3 Defects or damage from improper testing, operation, maintenance, installation, alteration, modification, or adjustment. 4 Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material workmanship. 5 A Product subjected to unauthorized Product modifications, disassembles or repairs (including, without limitation, the addition to the Product of non-MOTOROLA supplied equipment) which adversely affect performance of the Product or interfere with MOTOROLA's normal warranty inspection and testing of the Product to verify any warranty claim. 6 Product which has had the serial number removed or made illegible. 7 Rechargeable batteries if:

i L m i t e d W a r r a n t y any of the seals on the battery enclosure of cells are broken or show evidence of tampering. the damage or defect is caused by charging or using the battery in equipment or service other than the Product for which it is specified. 8 Freight costs to the repair depot. 9 A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized alteration of the software/firmware in the Product, does not function in accordance with MOTOROLAs published specifications or the FCC certification labeling in effect for the Product at the time the Product was initially distributed from MOTOROLA. 10 Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Product surfaces that does not affect the operation of the Product. 11 Normal and customary wear and tear. VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS:

MOTOROLA will defend, at its own expense, any suit brought against the end user purchaser to the extent that it is based on a claim that the Product or parts infringe a United States patent, and MOTOROLA will pay those costs and damages finally awarded against 319 English the end user purchaser in any such suit which are attributable to any such claim, but such defense and payments are conditioned on the following:

1 that MOTOROLA will be notified promptly in writing by such purchaser of any notice of such claim, 2 that MOTOROLA will have sole control of the defense of such suit and all negotiations for its settlement or compromise, and 3 should the Product or parts become, or in MOTOROLAs opinion be likely to become, the subject of a claim of infringement of a United States patent, that such purchaser will permit MOTOROLA, at its option and expense, either to procure for such purchaser the right to continue using the Product or parts or to replace or modify the same so that it becomes non-infringing or to grant such purchaser a credit for the Product or parts as depreciated and accept its return. The depreciation will be an equal amount per year over the lifetime of the Product or parts as established by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA will have no liability with respect to any claim of patent infringement which is based upon the combination of the Product or parts furnished hereunder with software, apparatus or devices not furnished by MOTOROLA, nor will MOTOROLA have any liability for the use of ancillary equipment or software not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product. The foregoing states the entire liability of MOTOROLA with respect to infringement of patents by the Product or any parts thereof. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for MOTOROLA certain exclusive rights for copyrighted MOTOROLA software such as the exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and distribute copies of such MOTOROLA software. MOTOROLA software may be used in only the Product in which the software was originally embodied and such software in such Product may not be replaced, copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used to produce any derivative thereof. No other use including, without limitation, alteration, modification, reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering of such MOTOROLA software or exercise of rights in such MOTOROLA software is permitted. No license is granted by implication, estoppel or otherwise under MOTOROLA patent rights or copyrights. y t n a r r a W d e t i m L i 320 English VII. GOVERNING LAW:

This Warranty is governed by the laws of the State of Illinois, U.S.A. i L m i t e d W a r r a n t y 321 English Motorola Solutions, Inc. 1303 East Algonquin Road Schaumburg, Illinois 60196 U.S.A. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 20122015 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved. Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance. November 2015 www.motorolasolutions.com/mototrbo

*68009502001*

68009502001-HC

 

 

6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 1 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM RF ENERGY EXPOSURE AND PRODUCT SAFETY GUIDE FOR PORTABLE TWO-WAY RADIOS ATTENTION!

Before using this radio, read this guide which contains important operating instructions for safe usage and RF energy awareness and control for compliance with applicable standards and regulations. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 2007 2013 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved. Motorola Solutions, Inc. 1303 E. Algonquin Rd., Schaumburg, IL 60196, U.S.A.

*NNTN7223F*

NNTN7223F 6881095C98-J English 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 2 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM RF Energy Exposure Awareness and Control Information and Operational Instructions for Occupational Use NOTICE: This radio is intended for use in occupational/controlled conditions where users have full knowledge of their exposure and can exercise control over their exposure to meet the occupational limits in FCC and International standards. This radio device is NOT authorized for general population consumer use. This two-way radio uses electromagnetic energy in the radio frequency (RF) spectrum to provide communications between two or more users over a distance. It uses radio frequency (RF) energy or radio waves to send and receive calls. RF energy is one form of electromagnetic energy. Other forms include, but are not limited to, sunlight and x-rays. RF energy, however, should not be confused with these other forms of electromagnetic energy, which when used improperly, can cause biological damage. Very high levels of x-rays, for example, can damage tissues and genetic material. Experts in science, engineering, medicine, health, and industry work with organizations to develop standards for safe exposure to RF energy. These standards provide recommended levels of RF exposure for both workers and the general public. These recommended RF exposure levels include substantial margins of protection. All Motorola two-way radios are designed, manufactured, and tested to ensure they meet government-established RF exposure levels. In addition, manufacturers also recommend specific operating instructions to users of two-way radios. These instructions are important because they inform users about RF energy exposure and provide simple procedures on how to control it. English 2 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 3 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Please refer to the following websites for more information on what RF energy exposure is and how to control your exposure to assure compliance with established RF exposure limits:

http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-faqs.html www.who.int/en/

www.motorolasolutions.com/rfhealth Federal Communication Commission (FCC) Regulations When two-way radios are used as a consequence of employment, the FCC requires users to be fully aware of and able to control their exposure to meet occupational requirements. Exposure awareness can be facilitated by the use of a product label directing users to specific user awareness information. Your Motorola two-way radio has a RF Exposure Product Label. Also, your Motorola user manual, or separate safety booklet includes information and operating instructions required to control your RF exposure and to satisfy compliance requirements. Compliance with RF Exposure Standards Your Motorola two-way radio is designed and tested to comply with a number of national and International standards and guidelines (listed below) for human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic energy. This radio complies with the IEEE (FCC) and ICNIRP exposure limits for occupational/controlled RF exposure environments at operating duty factors of up to 50% talk-50%

listen and is approved for occupational use only. In terms of measuring RF energy for compliance with these exposure guidelines, your radio generates measurable RF energy only while it is transmitting (during talking), not when it is receiving (listening) or in standby mode. 3 English 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 4 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM NOTE: The approved batteries, supplied with this radio, are rated for a 5-5-90 duty factor (5% talk-5% listen-90% standby) even though this radio complies with FCC occupational exposure limits and may operate at duty factors of up to 50% talk. Your Motorola two-way radio complies with the following RF energy exposure standards and guidelines:

United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC), Code of Federal Regulations; 47 CFR et seq. & FCC, OET Bulletin 65 Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) C95.1 International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) Ministry of Health (Canada) Safety Code 6 & Industry Canada RSS-102 Australian Communications Authority Radiocommunications Standard et seq. ANATEL ANNEX to Resolution No. 303 et seq. RF Exposure Compliance and Control Guidelines and Operating Instructions for Two-Way Radio Operations To control your exposure and ensure compliance with the occupational/controlled environment exposure limits, always adhere to the following procedures. DO NOT remove the RF Exposure Label from the device. User awareness instructions should accompany device when transferred to other users. English 4 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 5 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Two-Way Radio Operation Transmit no more than the rated duty factor of 50% of the time. To transmit

(talk), push the Push-To-Talk (PTT) button. To receive calls, release the PTT button. The PTT button may reside on the radio itself or may be hosted on approved wired or wireless (for example, a Bluetooth enabled remote Push-to-Talk button) accessories. Transmitting 50% of the time, or less, is important because this radio generates measurable RF energy exposure only when transmitting (in terms of measuring for standards compliance). In front of the face. Hold the radio in a vertical position with the microphone (and other parts of the radio including the antenna) at least one inch (2.5 centimeters) away from the nose or lips. Keeping the radio at a proper distance is important to ensure compliance. NOTE: RF exposures decrease with increasing distance from the antenna. Body Worn Operation. When worn on the body, always place the radio in a Motorola-approved clip, holder, holster, case, or body harness for this product. Using approved body-worn accessories is important because the use of non-

Motorola-approved accessories may result in exposure levels, which exceed the occupational/controlled environment RF exposure limits. Use only Motorola-approved supplied or replacement antennas, batteries, and audio accessories. Use of non-Motorola-approved antennas, batteries, and wired or wireless accessories may exceed the applicable RF exposure guidelines (iEEE, ICNIRP or FCC). For a list of Motorola-approved accessories for your radio model, visit the following website: http://www.motorolasolutions.com/governmentandenterprise 5 English 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 6 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Electromagnetic Interference/Compatibility NOTE: Nearly every electronic device is susceptible to electromagnetic interference (EMI) if inadequately shielded, designed, or otherwise configured for electromagnetic compatibility. Facilities To avoid electromagnetic interference and/or compatibility conflicts, turn off your radio in any facility where posted notices instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that is sensitive to external RF energy. Aircraft When instructed to do so, turn off your radio when on board an aircraft. Any use of a radio must be in accordance with applicable regulations per airline crew instructions. Medical Devices Pacemakers The Advanced Medical Technology Association (AdvaMed) recommends that a minimum separation of 6 inches (15 centimeters) be maintained between a handheld wireless radio and a pacemaker. These recommendations are consistent with those of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration. Persons with pacemakers should:

ALWAYS keep the radio more than 6 inches (15 centimeters) from their pacemaker when the radio is turned ON. Not carry the radio in the breast pocket. Use the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimize the potential for interference. Turn the radio OFF immediately if there is any reason to suspect that interference is taking place. English 6 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 7 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Hearing Aids Some digital wireless radios may interfere with some hearing aids. In the event of such interference, you may want to consult your hearing aid manufacturer to discuss alternatives. Other Medical Devices If you use any other personal medical device, consult the manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately shielded from RF energy. Your physician may be able to assist you in obtaining this information. Use of Communication Devices While Driving Always check the laws and regulations on the use of radios in the areas where you drive. Give full attention to driving and to the road. Use hands-free operation, if available. Pull off the road and park before making or answering a call, if driving conditions or regulations so require. 7 English 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 8 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Acoustic Safety Exposure to loud noises from any source for extended periods of time may temporarily or permanently affect your hearing. The louder the radio's volume, the less time is required before your hearing could be affected. Hearing damage from loud noise is sometimes undetectable at first and can have a cumulative effect. To protect your hearing:

Use the lowest volume necessary to do your job. Turn up the volume only if you are in noisy surroundings. Turn down the volume before adding headset or earpiece. Limit the amount of time you use headsets or earpieces at high volume. When using the radio without a headset or earpiece, do not place the radio's speaker directly against your ear. Operational Warnings W A R N I N G For Vehicle With Air Bags:

Refer to vehicle manufacturer's manual prior to installation of electronic equipment to avoid interference with air bag wiring. DO NOT place a portable radio in the area over an air bag or in the air bag deployment area. Air bags inflate with great force. If a portable radio is placed in the air bag deployment area and the air bag inflates, the radio may be propelled with great force and cause serious injury to occupants of the vehicle. English 8 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 9 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Operational Warnings (Continued) W A R N I N G Potentially Explosive Atmospheres

(Explosive atmospheres refers to hazard classified locations that may contain hazardous gas, vapors, or dusts.) Turn off your radio prior to entering any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere unless it is a portable radio type especially qualified for use in such areas as Intrinsically Safe (for example, Factory Mutual, CSA, UL, or CENELEC). DO NOT remove, install, or charge batteries in such areas. Sparks in a potentially explosive atmosphere can cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. The areas with potentially explosive atmospheres referred to above include fueling areas such as below decks on boats, fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities, and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust or metal powders. Areas with potentially explosive atmospheres are often, but not always, posted. Blasting Caps and Blasting Areas To avoid possible interference with blasting operations, turn off your radio when you are near electrical blasting caps, in a blasting area, or in areas posted: "Turn off two-way radio." Obey all signs and instructions. 9 English 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 10 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Operational Cautions C a u t i o n Antennas DO NOT use any portable radio that has a damaged antenna. If a damaged antenna comes into contact with your skin, a minor burn can result. Batteries All batteries can cause property damage and/or bodily injury, such as burns, if a conductive material such as jewelry, keys, or beaded chains touches exposed terminals. The conductive material may complete an electrical circuit (short circuit) and become quite hot. Exercise care in handling any charged battery, particularly when placing it inside a pocket, purse, or other container with metal objects. Intrinsically Safe Radio Information The Intrinsically safe approval unit refers to a product that has been approved as intrinsically safe by an approval agency (for example FM Approvals, CSA, UL, or Cenelec) and certifies that a particular product meets the Agency's applicable intrinsic safety standards for specific types of hazardous classified locations. A portable radio that has been approved for intrinsic safety will have Approval label attached to the radio to identify the unit as being Approved for specified hazardous atmospheres. This label specifies the hazardous Class/Division/Group along with the part number of the battery that must be used. The Intrinsically Safe Approval Label will be located on the portable radio unit. English 10 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 11 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Operational Cautions for Intrinsic Safe Equipment C a u t i o n DO NOT operate radio communications equipment in a hazardous atmosphere unless it is a type especially qualified (for example, FM, UL, CSA, or CENELEC approved). An explosion or fire may result. DO NOT operate a radio unit that has been approved as intrinsically safe product in a hazardous atmosphere if it has been physically damaged (for example, cracked housing). An explosion or fire may result. DO NOT replace or charge batteries in a hazardous atmosphere. Contact sparking may occur while installing or removing batteries and cause an explosion or fire. Warnings for Radios Approved as Intrinsically Safe Radios must ship from the Motorola manufacturing facility with the hazardous atmosphere capability and the intrinsic safety approval labelling (FM, UL, CSA, CENELEC). Radios will not be upgraded to this capability and labeled once they have been shipped to the field. A modification changes the units hardware from its original design configuration. Modifications can only be made by the original product manufacturer. 11 English 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 12 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM W A R N I N G Repair W A R N I N G DO NOT replace or change accessories in a hazardous atmosphere. Contact sparking may occur while installing or removing accessories and cause an explosion or fire. Turn the radio off before removing or installing a battery or accessory. DO NOT disassemble an intrinsically safe product in any way that exposes the internal circuits of the unit. Failure to use an intrinsically safe approved battery or Approved accessories specifically approved for the radio unit may result in the dangerously unsafe condition of an unapproved radio combination being used in a hazardous location. Unauthorized or incorrect modification of the intrinsically safe approved Product will negate the approval rating of the product. Incorrect repair or relabeling of any intrinsically safe Agency-

approved radio could adversely affect the Approval rating of the unit. Use of a radio that is not intrinsically safe in a hazardous atmosphere could result in serious injury or death. REPAIRS FOR MOTOROLA PRODUCTS WITH INTRINSICALLY SAFE APPROVAL ARE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE USER. Repairs to a Motorola FM approved radio product should only be done at a location that has been FM audited under the FM 3605 repairs and service standard. Contact Motorola for assistance regarding repairs and service of Motorola intrinsically safe equipment. English 12 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 13 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM A repair constitutes something done internally to the unit that would bring it back to its original condition. Items not considered as repairs are those in which an action is performed on a unit which does not require the outer casing of the unit to be opened in a manner that exposes the internal electrical circuits of the unit. Do Not Substitute Options or Accessories The Motorola communications equipment certified as intrinsically safe by the approving agency, (FM, UL, CSA, CENELEC) is tested as a complete system which consists of the listed agency Approved portable, Approved battery, and Approved accessories or options, or both. This Approved portable and battery combination must be strictly observed. There must be no substitution of items, even if the substitute has been previously Approved with a different Motorola communications equipment unit. Approved configurations are listed by the Approving Agency (FM, UL, CSA, CENELEC). The Intrinsically Safe Approval Label affixed to radio refers to the intrinsically safe classification of that radio product, and the approved batteries that can be used with that system. The manual PN referenced on the Intrinsically Safe Approval Label identifies the approved Accessories and or options that can be used with that portable radio unit. Using a non-Motorola-intrinsically-safe battery and or accessory with the Motorola approved radio unit will void the intrinsically safe approval of that radio unit. 13 English 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 14 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Notes:

English 14 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 15 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM GUIA DE SEGURANA DO PRODUTO E EXPOSIO ENERGIA DE RF PARA RDIOS PORTTEIS BIDIRECIONAIS ATENO!

Antes de usar o rdio, leia este guia que contm instrues operacionais importantes para uso seguro, informaes sobre conscientizao e controle de exposio energia de radiofrequncia (RF) para conformidade com os padres e regulamentos aplicveis. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS e a letra "M"

estilizada do logotipo so marcas comerciais ou marcas registradas da Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC e so utilizadas sob licena. Todas as demais marcas registradas so de propriedade de seus respectivos proprietrios. 2007 2013 Motorola Solutions, Inc. Todos os direitos reservados. Motorola Solutions, Inc. 1303 E. Algonquin Rd., Schaumburg, IL 60196, E.U.A.

*NNTN7223F*

NNTN7223F 6881095C98-J Portugus do Brasil 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 16 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Informaes sobre Conscientizao e Controle de Exposio RF e Instrues Operacionais para Uso Ocupacional COMUNICADO: este rdio destina-se ao uso em condies ocupacionais/

controladas, em que os usurios tm total conhecimento de sua exposio e possam exercer controle sobre sua exposio para atender aos limites ocupacionais definidos pela FCC e pelos padres internacionais. O dispositivo de rdio NO autorizado para uso pela populao em geral. Este rdio bidirecional usa energia eletromagntica no espectro de RF para fornecer comunicao distncia entre dois ou mais usurios. Ele usa energia de RF ou ondas de rdio para enviar e receber chamadas. A energia de RF uma forma de energia eletromagntica. Outras formas incluem, mas no so limitadas a, raios, raios solares e raios X. A energia de RF, entretanto, no deve ser confundida com essas outras formas de energia eletromagntica, que quando so usadas incorretamente, podem causar danos biolgicos. Nveis muito altos de raios X, por exemplo, podem danificar tecidos e material gentico. Especialistas em cincias, engenharia, medicina, sade e indstrias trabalham com organizaes para desenvolver padres de exposio segura energia de RF. Esses padres fornecem nveis recomendados de exposio RF para trabalhadores e para o pblico em geral. Os nveis recomendados de exposio RF incluem margens de segurana substanciais. Todos os rdios bidirecionais da Motorola so projetados, fabricados e testados para garantir que atendam aos nveis de exposio RF estabelecidos pelo governo. Alm disso, os fabricantes tambm recomendam instrues operacionais especficas para usurios de rdios bidirecionais. Essas instrues so importantes porque informam aos usurios sobre a exposio energia de RF e fornecem procedimentos simples sobre como controlar essa exposio. Portugus do Brasil 16 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 17 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Consulte os sites a seguir para obter mais informaes sobre a exposio energia de RF e como controlar a exposio para garantir conformidade com os limites de exposio RF estabelecidos:

http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-faqs.html www.who.int/en/

www.motorolasolutions.com/rfhealth Regulamentos da FCC Ao usar rdios bidirecionais por motivos de trabalho, a FCC (Federal Communication Commission, comisso federal de comunicao) requer que os usurios estejam totalmente conscientes e aptos a controlar sua exposio de modo a atender s exigncias ocupacionais. A conscientizao da exposio pode ser facilitada pelo uso de uma etiqueta no produto, direcionando o usurio para informaes de conscientizao especficas do usurio. O rdio bidirecional da Motorola possui uma Etiqueta no Produto sobre Exposio RF. Alm disso, o manual do usurio da Motorola, ou folheto de segurana em separado, inclui informaes e instrues operacionais necessrias para controlar a exposio RF e atender aos requisitos de conformidade. Conformidade com os Padres de Exposio RF O rdio bidirecional da Motorola foi projetado e testado para estar em conformidade com vrios padres e com as diretrizes nacionais e internacionais (listados a seguir) para exposio de seres humanos energia eletromagntica de radiofrequncia. Este rdio est em conformidade com os limites de exposio IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, instituto de engenheiros eltricos e eletrnicos) (FCC) e ICNIRP para ambientes ocupacionais/controlados de exposio RF em fatores operacionais de trabalho de at 50% de fala e 50%

de escuta e est aprovado apenas para uso ocupacional. Para medio de energia de RF para conformidade com essas diretrizes de exposio, o rdio gera energia de RF mensurvel apenas quando est transmitindo (na fala), no quando est recebendo (escuta) ou no modo de espera. 17 Portugus do Brasil 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 18 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM NOTA: As baterias aprovadas, fornecidas com o rdio, so para um fator de trabalho 5-5-90 (5% de fala-5% de escuta-90% de espera) apesar de o rdio estar em conformidade com os limites de exposio ocupacional da FCC e poder operar em fatores de trabalho de at 50% de fala. O rdio bidirecional da Motorola est em conformidade com os seguintes padres e diretrizes de exposio de energia de RF:

Cdigo de Regulamentos Federais da FCC; 47 CFR et seq. e FCC, OET Boletim 65 IEEE C95.1 ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-ionizing Radiation Protection. comisso internacional para a proteo contra as radiaes no ionizantes) Cdigo de segurana 6 do Ministrio da Sade (Canad) e da Indstria Canadense RSS-102 Australian Communications Authority Radiocommunications Standard et seq. ANEXO da ANATEL Resoluo n 303 et seq. Diretrizes de Conformidade e Controle de Exposio RF e Instrues Operacionais Relacionadas a Operaes de Rdios Bidirecionais Para controlar a exposio e garantir conformidade com os limites de exposio em ambientes ocupacionais/controlados, siga sempre os procedimentos a seguir. NO remova a Etiqueta de Exposio RF do dispositivo. As instrues de conscientizao do usurio devem acompanhar o dispositivo quando transferido para outros usurios. Portugus do Brasil 18 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 19 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Operao do Rdio Bidirecional No transmitir alm do fator calculado nominal de 50% do tempo. Para transmitir (falar), pressione o boto PTT (Push-To-Talk). Para receber chamadas, solte o boto PTT. O boto PTT pode estar localizado no rdio ou em acessrios aprovados com ou sem fio (por exemplo, um boto PTT remoto compatvel com Bluetooth). importante transmitir em 50% do tempo ou menos, pois este rdio gera exposio RF mensurvel somente ao transmitir

(em termos de medio para conformidade de padres). Em frente do rosto. Segure o rdio na posio vertical com o microfone (e outras partes do rdio incluindo a antena) a, no mnimo, 2,5 centmetros de distncia do nariz e da boca. Manter o rdio distncia apropriada importante para garantir a conformidade. NOTA: quanto maior o distanciamento da antena, menores as exposies RF. Uso junto ao corpo. Ao usar o rdio junto ao corpo, coloque-o em um prendedor, suporte, suporte para cinto ou estojo para este produto aprovado pela Motorola. importante usar os acessrios aprovados para uso junto ao corpo, porque o uso de acessrios no aprovados pela Motorola pode resultar em nveis de exposio que excedem os limites de exposio RF para ambiente ocupacional/controlado. Use somente antenas, baterias e acessrios de udio fornecidos ou de substituio aprovados pela Motorola. O uso de antenas, baterias e acessrios com ou sem fio no aprovados pela Motorola, pode exceder as diretrizes aplicveis de exposio RF (IEEE, ICNIRP ou FCC). Para obter uma lista de acessrios aprovados pela Motorola para o modelo de seu rdio, acesse o site:

http://www.motorolasolutions.com/governmentandenterprise 19 Portugus do Brasil 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 20 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Interferncia/Compatibilidade Eletromagntica NOTA: quase todo dispositivo eletrnico suscetvel interferncia eletromagntica (EMI) quando blindado, projetado ou de alguma forma configurado inadequadamente para compatibilidade eletromagntica. Instalaes Para evitar interferncia eletromagntica e/ou conflitos de compatibilidade, desligue o rdio em qualquer instalao onde haja avisos dizendo para faz-lo. Hospitais e casas de sade podem utilizar equipamentos sensveis energia de RF externa. Aeronaves Desligue seu rdio a bordo de aeronaves, quando orientado a faz-lo. O rdio deve ser utilizado de acordo com as instrues fornecidas pela tripulao. Equipamentos Mdicos Marca-passos A AdvaMed (Advanced Medical Technology Association) recomenda que seja mantida uma distncia mnima de 15 cm entre um rdio porttil sem fio e um marca-passo. Estas recomendaes so consistentes com as determinaes da FDA (rgo de vigilncia sanitria do governo dos EUA). Os portadores de marca-passos devem:

Manter SEMPRE o rdio a mais de 15 cm do marca-passo quando o rdio estiver ligado. No levar o rdio no bolso da camisa. Usar o aparelho no ouvido do lado oposto ao do marca-passo para reduzir a possibilidade de interferncia. DESLIGAR o rdio imediatamente se houver qualquer motivo para se suspeitar de interferncia. Portugus do Brasil 20 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 21 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Aparelhos Auditivos Alguns rdios digitais sem fio podem interferir em aparelhos auditivos. Caso haja esse tipo de interferncia, consulte o fabricante do aparelho auditivo para obter alternativas. Outros Equipamentos Mdicos Caso use outros equipamentos mdicos, consulte o fabricante para verificar se ele est adequadamente protegido contra energia de RF. Seu mdico pode ajud-lo a obter essas informaes. Uso de Equipamentos de Comunicao Durante a Operao de Veculos Informe-se sempre sobre as leis e normas a respeito do uso de rdios nas reas onde voc dirige. Preste ateno no trnsito e na rodovia. Use a opo viva-voz, se disponvel. Saia da rodovia e estacione o carro antes de fazer ou receber uma ligao, se as condies de trnsito ou as regulamentaes assim exigirem. 21 Portugus do Brasil 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 22 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Segurana Acstica A exposio a rudos muito altos de qualquer origem por longos perodos pode prejudicar sua audio temporria ou permanentemente. Quanto mais alto for o volume do rdio, menos tempo ser necessrio para prejudicar sua audio. s vezes, os danos auditivos causados por rudos fortes no so detectados em sua fase inicial e podem ter efeito cumulativo. Para proteger sua audio:

Use o volume mais baixo necessrio para a execuo sua tarefa. S aumente o volume se estiver em ambientes com excesso de rudos. Reduza o volume antes de conectar o headset ou o fone de ouvido. Limite o tempo de uso dos headsets ou fones de ouvido com volume alto. Ao usar o rdio sem monofones ou fones de ouvido, no coloque o alto-falante do rdio diretamente em contato com seus ouvidos. Avisos Operacionais ATENO Para Veculos Equipados com Air Bag:

Consulte o manual do fabricante do veculo antes de instalar equipamentos eletrnicos para evitar interferncia com o funcionamento do air bag. NO coloque um rdio porttil na rea sobre um air bag ou na rea de liberao do air bag, pois eles inflam com muita fora. Se um rdio porttil estiver colocado na rea de liberao do air bag e o air bag inflar, o rdio poder ser impelido com grande fora e causar srios ferimentos aos ocupantes do veculo. Portugus do Brasil 22 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 23 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Avisos Operacionais (continuao) ATENO Ambientes potencialmente explosivos

(Ambientes potencialmente explosivos referem-se a locais classificados como de risco que podem conter gases, vapores ou ps nocivos.) Desligue o rdio antes de entrar em uma rea com ambiente potencialmente explosivo, a menos que ele seja um tipo de rdio porttil especialmente qualificado para o uso em tais reas como Intrinsecamente Seguro (por exemplo, Factory Mutual, CSA, UL ou CENELEC). NO remova, instale ou carregue baterias nessas reas. Fascas em um ambiente potencialmente explosivo podem causar uma exploso ou incndio que pode resultar em ferimentos e at mesmo em morte. As reas com ambientes potencialmente explosivos referidas acima incluem reas de abastecimento, como reas abaixo do convs principal em barcos, instalaes de armazenamento ou transferncia de produtos qumicos ou combustveis e reas onde o ar contm partculas ou elementos qumicos, como fibras, poeira ou ps metlicos. As reas com ambientes potencialmente explosivos so frequentes, mas nem sempre h avisos sobre isso. reas e Equipamentos para Detonao Para evitar possveis interferncias em operaes de detonao, desligue o rdio quando estiver prximo a detonadores eltricos, reas de detonao ou reas onde haja avisos tais como: "Desligue o rdio bidirecional." Obedea a todas as sinalizaes e instrues. 23 Portugus do Brasil 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 24 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Cuidados Operacionais Precauo Antenas NO utilize um rdio porttil com antena danificada. Se a antena danificada entrar em contato com sua pele, poder causar uma queimadura leve. Baterias Todas as baterias podem causar danos materiais e ferimentos, tais como queimaduras, se um material condutor como uma joia, chave ou corrente tocar os terminais expostos. O material condutor pode fechar um circuito eltrico (curto-circuito) e esquentar muito. Tenha cuidado ao manipular uma bateria carregada, principalmente ao coloc-la dentro do bolso, de uma bolsa ou em outro local em que haja objetos de metal. Informaes sobre Rdio Intrinsecamente Seguro A unidade de aprovao Intrinsecamente seguro refere-se a um produto que foi aprovado como intrinsecamente seguro por um rgo de aprovao (por exemplo, FM Approvals, CSA, UL ou Cenelec) e certifica que um determinado produto atende aos padres de segurana intrnseca aplicveis do rgo para determinados tipos de locais classificados como de risco. Um rdio porttil que foi aprovado como intrinsecamente seguro ter uma etiqueta de aprovao no rdio para identificar a unidade como aprovada para uso nas atmosferas de risco especificadas. Essa etiqueta especifica a classe, a diviso e o grupo de risco, bem como o nmero de pea da bateria que dever ser utilizada. A Etiqueta de Aprovao de Intrinsecamente Seguro estar localizada na unidade de rdio porttil. Portugus do Brasil 24 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 25 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Cuidados na Operao de Equipamento de Segurana Intrnseca Precauo NO opere o equipamento de comunicaes de rdio em atmosferas de risco a menos que seja um tipo especialmente qualificado (por exemplo, aprovado pela FM, UL, CSA, ou CENELEC). O resultado poder ser uma exploso ou fogo. NO opere uma unidade de rdio aprovada como intrinsecamente segura em atmosferas de risco se ela estiver danificada fisicamente

(por exemplo, parte externa rachada). O resultado poder ser uma exploso ou fogo. NO substitua ou carregue baterias em atmosfera de risco. Podem ocorrer fascas no contato durante a instalao ou remoo das baterias, causando exploso ou fogo. Avisos para Rdios Aprovados como Intrinsecamente Seguros Os rdios devem ser enviados da fbrica da Motorola com a etiqueta de aprovao de recursos para atmosfera de risco e de segurana intrnseca (FM, UL, CSA, CENELEC). Os rdios no sero atualizados para esse recurso e etiquetados depois de serem enviados. Uma modificao altera o hardware da unidade da sua configurao de projeto original. As modificaes podem ser feitas apenas pelo fabricante original do produto. 25 Portugus do Brasil 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 26 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM ATENO NO substitua nem mude os acessrios em uma atmosfera de risco. Podem ocorrer fascas no contato durante a instalao ou remoo dos acessrios e causar exploso ou fogo. Desligue o rdio antes de remover ou instalar a bateria ou acessrio. NO desmonte um produto intrinsecamente seguro de forma a expor os circuitos internos da unidade. Se uma bateria intrinsecamente segura ou acessrios aprovados especificamente para o rdio no forem usados, poder resultar em uma condio insegura perigosa de uma combinao no aprovada sendo usada em um local de risco. A modificao incorreta ou no autorizada do Produto aprovado intrinsecamente seguro negar a aprovao da classificao do produto. Os reparos ou etiquetagem incorretos de um rdio aprovado como intrinsecamente seguro podero afetar a aprovao da classificao da unidade. O uso de um rdio que no intrinsecamente seguro em uma atmosfera de risco poder resultar em danos graves e at em morte. Reparos ATENO OS REPAROS DE PRODUTOS DA MOTOROLA COM APROVAO INTRINSECAMENTE SEGURA SO DE RESPONSABILIDADE DO USURIO. Os reparos em um rdio aprovado Motorola FM devero ser feitos apenas em um local auditado pela FM sob a norma de reparos e servios FM 3605. Entre em contato com a Motorola para obter assistncia sobre reparos e servios em equipamentos Motorola intrinsecamente seguros. Portugus do Brasil 26 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 27 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Um reparo constitui algo sendo feito internamente na unidade que a retornar as suas condies originais. Os itens que no so considerados como reparos so os em que a ao realizada em uma unidade que no precisa que a parte externa seja aberta para expor os circuitos eltricos internos da unidade. No Substitua Opes ou Acessrios O equipamento de comunicao Motorola certificado como intrinsecamente seguro pelos rgos de aprovao (FM, UL, CSA, CENELEC), testado como um sistema completo que consiste do porttil aprovado, bateria aprovada e acessrios e/ou opes aprovados pelo rgo listado. Essa combinao de porttil e bateria aprovada deve ser estritamente observada. No pode haver substituio de itens, mesmo se o substituto tiver sido aprovado previamente com um equipamento de comunicaes Motorola diferente. As configuraes aprovadas so listadas pelo rgo Aprovador (FM, UL, CSA, CENELEC). A Etiqueta de Aprovao de Intrinsecamente Seguro afixada ao rdio refere-se classificao de intrinsecamente seguro do rdio e da bateria aprovada que pode ser usada com o sistema. O PN manual referenciado na Etiqueta de Aprovao de Intrinsecamente Seguro identifica os acessrios ou opes aprovados que podem ser usados com a unidade de rdio porttil. O uso de uma bateria e/ou acessrio intrinsecamente seguro no Motorola com a unidade de rdio aprovada da Motorola invalidar a aprovao de segurana intrnseca da unidade de rdio. 27 Portugus do Brasil 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 28 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Notas:

Portugus do Brasil 28 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 29 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM RADIOS BIDIRECTIONNELLES PORTATIVES :

EXPOSITION AUX RADIOFRQUENCES ET SCURIT DU PRODUIT ATTENTION!

Avant d'utiliser cette radio, lisez le guide, qui contient d'importantes instructions de fonctionnement pour une utilisation scuritaire et des informations sur l'exposition aux frquences radiolectriques, dans le but dassurer votre conformit aux normes et rglements en vigueur. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS et le logotype au M stylis sont des marques de commerce ou des marques dposes de Motorola Trademark Holdings LLC et sont utilises sous licence. Toutes les autres marques de commerce sont la proprit de leurs titulaires respectifs. 2007 2013 Motorola Solutions, Inc. Tous droits rservs. Motorola Solutions, Inc. 1303 E. Algonquin Rd., Schaumburg, IL 60196, U.S.A.

*NNTN7223F*

NNTN7223F 6881095C98-J Franais Canadien 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 30 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Sensibilisation l'exposition l'nergie de RF, moyens de contrle et consignes d'utilisation pour l'usage professionnel de cette radio NOTICE :Cette radio a t conue pour un usage professionnel dans un environnement contrl, o les utilisateurs sont pleinement conscients de l'exposition l'nergie de RF laquelle ils sont soumis et peuvent exercer un contrle sur cette exposition afin de respecter les limites tablies par la FCC et les normes internationales. Ce dispositif radio n'est PAS autoris pour l'utilisation grand public par des consommateurs ordinaires. Cette radio bidirectionnelle utilise de l'nergie lectromagntique dans le spectre de radiofrquence (RF) afin de permettre les communications distance entre deux utilisateurs ou plus. Elle utilise l'nergie de radiofrquence ou les ondes radio pour mettre et recevoir des appels. L'nergie de RF est une forme d'nergie lectromagntique. Ce type d'nergie se prsente sous d'autres formes, notamment la lumire solaire et les rayons X. Il ne faut cependant pas confondre l'nergie de RF avec d'autres formes d'nergie lectromagntique qui, lorsqu'elles sont mal utilises, peuvent occasionner des dommages biologiques. Des niveaux trs levs de rayons X, par exemple, peuvent endommager les tissus et le matriel gntique. Des spcialistes dans les domaines des sciences, de l'ingnierie, de la mdecine, de la sant et de l'industrie travaillent avec diffrentes organisations l'laboration de normes relatives l'exposition scuritaire l'nergie de RF. Ces normes fournissent les niveaux recommands d'exposition aux RF, tant pour les travailleurs que pour le public en gnral. Ces niveaux recommands d'exposition aux RF comprennent des coefficients de scurit apprciables. Toutes les radios bidirectionnelles Motorola sont conues, fabriques et testes de manire garantir leur conformit aux niveaux d'exposition aux radiofrquences tablis par les autorits publiques comptentes. Par ailleurs, les fabricants recommandent aux utilisateurs de radios bidirectionnelles de suivre des directives de fonctionnement spcifiques. Ces directives sont importantes puisqu'elles informent les utilisateurs sur l'exposition l'nergie de RF et proposent des moyens simples pour la contrler. Franais Canadien 30 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 31 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Visitez les sites Web suivants pour obtenir plus de renseignements sur ce qu'est l'nergie de RF et sur les moyens de contrle prendre afin de respecter les limites tablies en matire d'exposition aux radiofrquences. http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-faqs.html www.who.int/fr/

www.motorolasolutions.com/rfhealth Rglements de la Commission fdrale amricaine des communications (FCC) Lorsque les radios bidirectionnelles sont utilises des fins professionnelles, la FCC exige que les utilisateurs soient pleinement conscients des effets de l'exposition et qu'ils soient capables de contrler le niveau d'exposition auquel ils se soumettent afin de rpondre aux exigences de leur profession. Vous pouvez contribuer la sensibilisation des utilisateurs l'exposition aux radiofrquences en apposant des tiquettes de produit leur offrant une rfrence vers la source d'information approprie. Votre radio bidirectionnelle Motorola comporte une tiquette de produit sur l'exposition aux radiofrquences. D'autre part, vous trouverez dans le manuel de l'utilisateur du produit Motorola ou dans la brochure de scurit fournie sparment les informations requises et le mode d'emploi permettant de contrler l'exposition l'nergie de RF et de garantir le respect des normes. Conformit aux normes sur l'exposition aux radiofrquences Cette radio bidirectionnelle Motorola a t conue et teste afin de garantir sa conformit aux normes et recommandations nationales et internationales ci-dessous lies l'exposition des tres humains l'nergie lectromagntique de radiofrquence. Cette radio respecte les limites d'exposition tablies par l'IEEE (FCC) et l'ICNIRP pour les environnements professionnels ou avec contrle d'exposition aux radiofrquences, des cycles d'utilisation allant jusqu' 50 % mission 50 % rception et est approuve pour un usage professionnel seulement. En ce qui concerne la mesure de l'nergie de RF afin d'valuer la conformit ces normes d'exposition, la radio met de l'nergie de RF mesurable seulement lorsqu'elle est en mode mission (lorsque l'utilisateur parle), et non pas lorsqu'elle est en mode rception (lorsque l'utilisateur coute) ni en mode Attente. 31 Franais Canadien 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 32 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM REMARQUE : Les batteries approuves, fournies avec cette radio, sont cotes en fonction d'un cycle d'utilisation de 5-5-90 (5% mission5 % rception 90 % attente), mme si la radio respecte les limites d'exposition tablies par la FCC pour l'usage professionnel et peut fonctionner selon des cycles d'utilisation allant jusqu' 50 % mission. Cette radio bidirectionnelle Motorola est conforme aux normes et aux lignes directrices suivantes relatives l'exposition l'nergie de RF :

Commission fdrale amricaine des communications (FCC), Code of Federal Regulations (code de la rglementation fdrale); FCC 47 partie CFR et suiv. FCC, OET Bulletin 65 Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) C95.1 Commission internationale de protection contre les rayonnements non ionisants

(ICNIRP) Code de scurit 6 du Ministre de la Sant (Canada) et norme CNR-102 d'Industrie Canada Norme de l'Australian Communications Authority Radiocommunications et suiv. ANATEL ANNEXE la Rsolution N 303 et suiv. Directives de conformit et de contrle de l'exposition aux RF et directives de fonctionnement pour la communication bidirectionnelle Pour contrler votre exposition et garantir le respect des limites d'exposition en milieu professionnel ou contrl, observez toujours les consignes suivantes. NE dcollez PAS l'tiquette sur l'exposition l'nergie de RF du dispositif. Lorsque l'appareil est cd d'autres utilisateurs, il doit tre accompagn des informations de sensibilisation des utilisateurs. Franais Canadien 32 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 33 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Communication bidirectionnelle Transmission ne dpassant pas le facteur nominal de 50 % du temps. Pour transmettre (parler), appuyez sur le bouton de transmission (PTT). Pour recevoir les appels, relchez le bouton de transmission. Le bouton PTT peut se trouver sur la radio elle-mme ou sur un accessoire avec ou sans fil approuv (par exemple, un bouton de transmission Bluetooth distant). Il est important de ne pas mettre plus de 50 % du temps tant donn que cette radio gnre une nergie de RF dont l'exposition n'est mesurable que lors de l'mission (en termes de conformit aux normes de mesure). Devant le visage. Tenez la radio la verticale, en maintenant une distance d'au moins 2,5 centimtres (1 pouce) entre le micro (et les autres parties de la radio, y compris l'antenne) et le nez ou les lvres. Garder la radio une distance approprie est important afin de garantir le respect des limites. REMARQUE : L'exposition aux radiofrquences diminue quand la distance de l'antenne augmente. Utilisation lorsque la radio est porte sur soi. Lorsque la radio est porte sur soi, utilisez toujours une pince ou une attache de ceinture, placez-la dans un tui ou dans un harnais pour le corps approuv par Motorola pour ce produit. Il est important d'utiliser des accessoires ajusts au corps qui sont approuvs, car dans le cas contraire, l'utilisateur risque de s'exposer des niveaux d'nergie de RF suprieurs aux limites tablies pour les environnements professionnels ou exposition contrle. N'utilisez que des antennes, des batteries et des accessoires audio fournis ou de remplacement approuvs par Motorola. L'utilisation d'antennes, batteries et accessoires avec ou sans fil non approuvs par Motorola pourrait excder les directives d'exposition aux RF applicables (IEEE, ICNIRP ou FCC). Pour une liste des accessoires approuvs par Motorola pour votre modle de radio, visitez le site Web suivant :

http://www.motorolasolutions.com/governmentandenterprise 33 Franais Canadien 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 34 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Interfrence/compatibilit lectromagntique REMARQUE : La grande majorit des dispositifs lectroniques sont sensibles l'effet lectromagntique perturbateur (EMI) s'ils ne sont pas convenablement protgs ou s'ils ne sont pas conus ou configurs de telle sorte qu'ils soient compatibles avec ce type de signaux lectromagntiques. Btiments Afin d'viter des problmes d'interfrence et/ou de compatibilit lectromagntique, teignez la radio lorsque cette consigne est affiche sur un panneau. Il se peut, par exemple, que les hpitaux ou les tablissements de sant utilisent des appareils sensibles l'nergie de RF externe. Aronefs bord d'un avion, teignez la radio lorsque l'quipage vous le demande. Toute utilisation de la radio doit se faire conformment aux rglements en vigueur de la compagnie arienne et sur instructions de l'quipage. Appareils mdicaux Stimulateurs cardiaques L'Association de technologie mdicale avance (AdvaMed, Advanced Medical Technology Association) recommande de conserver une distance minimale de 15 centimtres (6 pouces) entre une radio portative sans fil et un stimulateur cardiaque. Ces recommandations concordent avec les dispositions de l'office amricain de contrle des produits pharmaceutiques et alimentaires (FDA, Food and Drug Administration). Franais Canadien 34 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 35 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Les personnes qui portent un stimulateur cardiaque doivent :

TOUJOURS maintenir la radio plus de 15 centimtres (6 pouces) de leur stimulateur cardiaque lorsque la radio est sous tension. Ne pas porter la radio dans une poche-portefeuille. Placer la radio au niveau de l'oreille oppose au stimulateur cardiaque afin de minimiser la possibilit de brouillage. teindre la radio immdiatement si elles ont des raisons de penser qu'il existe une interfrence quelconque. Prothses auditives Certaines radios numriques sans fil peuvent interfrer avec certains types d'aides auditives. Si tel est le cas, veuillez consulter le fabricant de la prothse auditive pour discuter d'autres solutions possibles. Autres dispositifs mdicaux Si vous utilisez tout autre dispositif mdical personnel, consultez le fabricant du dispositif afin de dterminer s'il est convenablement protg contre l'nergie de RF externe. Votre mdecin peut vous aider obtenir ces renseignements. Utilisation de dispositifs de communication pendant la conduite d'un vhicule Vrifiez toujours les lois et rglements relis l'utilisation des radios dans les rgions o vous conduisez. Concentrez-vous entirement sur votre conduite et sur la route. Utilisez le mode mains libres, s'il est disponible. Rangez-vous sur l'accotement avant de faire un appel ou d'y rpondre si les conditions de conduite sont particulirement mauvaises ou si les lois et rglements l'exigent. 35 Franais Canadien 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 36 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Protection de l'oue Une exposition des bruits forts en provenance de n'importe quelle source pendant de longues priodes de temps pourrait affecter votre audition de manire temporaire ou permanente. Plus le volume sonore de la radio est lev, plus votre audition peut se dtriorer rapidement. Des dommages auditifs dus l'exposition des bruits forts peuvent d'abord tre indtectables, mais ceux-ci ont parfois des effets cumulatifs. Pour protger votre audition :

Rglez le volume le plus bas possible pour effectuer votre travail. Montez le volume seulement si vous vous trouvez dans un environnement bruyant. Baissez le volume avant d'ajouter un casque ou une oreillette. Limitez la priode de temps d'utilisation de casques ou d'couteurs volume lev. Lorsque vous utilisez la radio sans casque ni couteur, ne placez pas le haut-parleur directement sur votre oreille. Avertissements de fonctionnement AVERTISSEMENT Pour les vhicules quips de coussins gonflables :

Consultez le manuel du fabricant du vhicule avant d'installer un appareil lectronique, afin d'viter toute interfrence avec le cblage des coussins gonflables. NE placez PAS de radio portative dans la zone situe au-dessus d'un coussin gonflable ou dans la zone de dploiement de ce dernier. Un coussin gonflable de scurit se dploie avec beaucoup de force. Si une radio portative se trouve dans la zone de dploiement du coussin lorsque celui-ci se gonfle, la radio peut tre propulse avec une force considrable et risque alors d'occasionner de graves lsions corporelles aux passagers du vhicule. Franais Canadien 36 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 37 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Avertissements de fonctionnement (suite) AVERTISSEMENT Atmosphres potentiellement explosives

(Les atmosphres explosives sont des endroits classifis comme dangereux, pouvant contenir des vapeurs, des poudres ou des gaz dangereux.) teignez la radio avant d'entrer dans un milieu avec une atmosphre potentiellement explosive, sauf s'il s'agit d'une radio portative de type scurit intrinsque spcialement conue pour l'utilisation dans un tel milieu (par exemple, s'il s'agit d'une radio homologue par Factory Mutual, CSA, UL ou CENELEC). VITEZ d'enlever, de remplacer ou de recharger les batteries dans un tel milieu. Les tincelles dans des atmosphres potentiellement explosives peuvent provoquer une explosion ou un incendie et entraner des lsions corporelles, voire la mort. Parmi les zones potentiellement explosives mentionnes plus haut, citons les zones de ravitaillement en carburant, par exemple la cale des bateaux, les installations de transfert et de stockage de carburant ou de produits chimiques et les zones dans lesquelles l'air est charg en produits chimiques ou en particules telles que de la poudre de crales, de la poussire ou des poudres mtalliques. Les zones atmosphres potentiellement explosives affichent gnralement des panneaux de mise en garde, mais ce n'est pas toujours le cas. Zone de dynamitage et de dtonateurs teignez la radio lorsque vous vous trouvez proximit de dtonateurs lectriques ou dans une zone de dynamitage afin d'viter de dclencher une explosion, ou lorsque vous vous trouvez dans un endroit o il est indiqu : teindre les radios bidirectionnelles . Respectez tous les panneaux et toutes les consignes. 37 Franais Canadien 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 38 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Prcautions relatives au fonctionnement Prcaution Antennes N'utilisez PAS une radio portative, quelle qu'elle soit, dont l'antenne est endommage. Si une antenne endommage entre en contact avec votre peau, il peut en rsulter une brlure lgre. Batteries Toutes les batteries peuvent provoquer des dommages, des blessures ou des brlures si un objet conducteur, par exemple un bijou, une cl ou les mailles d'une chane, entre en contact avec les bornes de la batterie. Le matriel conducteur risque de fermer un circuit lectrique (court-circuit) et de devenir trs chaud. Manipulez avec prcaution les batteries charges, en particulier lorsqu'elles sont places dans une poche, un sac main ou tout autre endroit contenant des objets mtalliques. Informations sur les radios scurit intrinsque L'homologation titre de produit scurit intrinsque indique qu'un produit a t reconnu intrinsquement scuritaire par un service d'homologation (par exemple, FM Approvals, CSA, UL ou Cenelec) et certifie qu'un produit particulier rpond aux normes applicables du service d'homologation en matire de scurit pour certains types particuliers de milieux dangereux classifis. Toute radio portative ayant t agre de scurit intrinsque doit porter l'tiquette d'homologation correspondante qui l'identifie comme tant agre pour un usage dans des atmosphres dangereuses spcifies. L'tiquette spcifie la catgorie de risque laquelle correspond la batterie (Classe/Division/Groupe), ainsi que le numro de rfrence de la batterie qui doit tre utilis. L'tiquette d'homologation d'un dispositif de scurit intrinsque doit tre appose sur l'unit de radio portative. Franais Canadien 38 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 39 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Prcautions relatives au fonctionnement de l'quipement de scurit intrinsque Prcaution NE PAS faire fonctionner d'appareil de communication radio dans une atmosphre dangereuse moins qu'il ne soit d'un type appropri

(par exemple, homologu par FM, UL, CSA ou CENELEC). Vous risquez de provoquer une explosion ou un incendie. NE PAS faire fonctionner une radio scurit intrinsque homologue dans une atmosphre dangereuse si la radio est endommage (par exemple, si son botier est fendu). Vous risquez de provoquer une explosion ou un incendie. NE PAS remplacer NI charger des batteries dans une atmosphre dangereuse. La production d'tincelles lors de l'installation ou du retrait des batteries prsente un risque d'incendie ou d'explosion. Avertissements concernant les radios agres de scurit intrinsque Les radios doivent offrir la possibilit d'utilisation dans une atmosphre dangereuse et porter l'tiquette d'homologation titre d'appareil scurit intrinsque avant d'tre expdies de l'usine de fabrication de Motorola. Les radios ne pourront tre mises niveau afin d'offrir cette caractristique ni tre tiquetes comme telles une fois expdies et achemines sur le terrain. Toute modification change la configuration du modle d'origine des composants de l'unit. Les modifications ne peuvent tre effectues que par le fabricant du produit d'origine. 39 Franais Canadien 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 40 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM VITEZ de remplacer ou de changer des accessoires dans une atmosphre dangereuse. Des tincelles peuvent se produire lors de l'installation ou du retrait des accessoires et provoquer un incendie ou une explosion. teignez la radio avant d'enlever ou d'installer une batterie ou un AVERTISSEMENT accessoire. NE PAS dsassembler un produit scurit intrinsque de manire exposer les circuits internes de l'unit. Le fait de ne pas utiliser une batterie scurit intrinsque homologue ou des accessoires approuvs spcialement conus pour le modle de radio utilis peut crer une dangereuse situation de risque cause par l'utilisation d'un ensemble radio non approuv dans un endroit dangereux. Toute modification incorrecte ou non agre du produit agr de scurit intrinsque annulera la classification de ce dernier. La rparation incorrecte ou le nouvel tiquetage de toute radio scurit intrinsque homologue par un service d'homologation risque d'annuler la classe d'homologation de l'unit. L'utilisation d'une radio autre qu'une radio scurit intrinsque dans une atmosphre dangereuse est susceptible d'entraner des blessures graves ou la mort. Rparation AVERTISSEMENT IL INCOMBE L'UTILISATEUR DE FAIRE FAIRE LES RPARATIONS NCESSAIRES AUX PRODUITS MOTOROLA SCURIT INTRINSQUE HOMOLOGUS. La rparation d'une radio Motorola agre par la FMRC doit tre exclusivement effectue dans des locaux superviss par la FMRC rpondant aux normes d'homologation FMRC numro de classe 3605 relatives au service et la rparation. Contactez Motorola afin d'obtenir une assistance pour le service et la rparation d'units Motorola scurit intrinsque. Franais Canadien 40 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 41 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Le terme rparation dsigne tout travail effectu sur les composants internes de l'unit afin de ramener celle-ci son tat d'origine. Un travail qui ne ncessite pas l'ouverture du botier de l'unit afin d'en exposer les circuits lectriques internes ne constitue pas une rparation. vitez d'interchanger des options ou des accessoires. L'quipement de communications Motorola certifi de scurit intrinsque par l'entit d'homologation (FMRC, UL, CSA, CENELEC) est test en tant que systme complet, savoir : la radio portative, la batterie, les accessoires et les options, tous agrs par l'entit correspondante. L'intgrit de cette configuration forme d'une radio portative et d'une batterie agres doit tre strictement respecte. Aucune substitution d'lment n'est permise, mme si l'lment de remplacement a pralablement t agr pour une autre unit de communication Motorola. Les configurations agres peuvent tre consultes dans la liste mise disposition par l'entit d'homologation (FMRC, UL, CSA, CENELEC). L'tiquette d'homologation de scurit intrinsque appose sur la radio identifie la classification de scurit intrinsque de cette radio ainsi que les batteries agres qui peuvent tre utilises avec ce systme. Le numro de rfrence du manuel mentionn sur l'tiquette d'homologation de scurit intrinsque identifie les accessoires et/ou les options agrs qui peuvent tre utiliss avec cette unit de radio portative. Le fait de ne pas utiliser une batterie ou un accessoire Motorola de scurit intrinsque avec l'unit de radio Motorola agre annule l'homologation de scurit intrinsque de cette unit de radio. 41 Franais Canadien 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 42 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Remarques :

Franais Canadien 42 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 43 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM GUA DE EXPOSICIN DE ENERGA DE RADIOFRECUENCIA Y SEGURIDAD DEL PRODUCTO PARA RADIOS BIDIRECCIONALES PORTTILES ATENCIN!

Antes de usar este radio, lea esta gua que contiene instrucciones de funcionamiento importantes para un uso seguro del dispositivo e instrucciones para tomar conciencia y controlar la energa de RADIOFRECUENCIA para cumplir con las normas y regulaciones correspondientes. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS y el logotipo de la M estilizada son marcas comerciales o marcas comerciales registradas de Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC y se utilizan bajo licencia. Todas las dems marcas comerciales pertenecen a sus respectivos dueos. 2007 2013 Motorola Solutions, Inc. Todos los derechos reservados. Motorola Solutions, Inc. 1303 E. Algonquin Rd., Schaumburg, IL 60196, EE.UU.

*NNTN7223F*

NNTN7223F 6881095C98-J Espaol Latinoamericano 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 44 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Informacin para tomar conciencia y controlar la exposicin a la energa de RF e instrucciones de funcionamiento para uso profesional AVISO: Este radio est diseado para usarse en condiciones controladas o profesionales, donde los usuarios tengan pleno conocimiento de su exposicin y puedan controlar su exposicin para cumplir con los lmites profesionales de la FCC y de los estndares internacionales. Este dispositivo de radio NO est autorizado para el uso particular de la poblacin en general. El radio bidireccional utiliza energa electromagntica en el espectro de la frecuencia de radio (RF) para lograr la comunicacin a distancia entre dos o ms usuarios. Emplea energa de radiofrecuencia (RF) u ondas de radio para enviar y recibir llamadas. La energa de RF es una forma de energa electromagntica. Otras formas incluyen, por ejemplo, la luz solar y los rayos X. Sin embargo, no debe confundirse la energa de RF con otras formas de energa electromagntica que, al usarse de manera incorrecta, pueden producir daos biolgicos. Los niveles muy elevados de rayos X, por ejemplo, pueden daar los tejidos y el material gentico. Expertos en ciencias, ingeniera, medicina, salud e industria trabajan con ciertas organizaciones para desarrollar estndares para una exposicin segura a la energa de RF. Estos estndares indican los niveles recomendados de exposicin a radiofrecuencia, tanto para los trabajadores como para el pblico en general. Estos niveles de exposicin a radiofrecuencia incluyen mrgenes de proteccin bastante amplios. Todos los radios bidireccionales de Motorola han sido diseados, fabricados y probados para garantizar que cumplan con los niveles de exposicin a radiofrecuencia establecidos por el gobierno. Adems, los fabricantes recomiendan instrucciones de funcionamiento especficas para los usuarios de radios bidireccionales. Estas instrucciones son relevantes, ya que informan al usuario acerca de la exposicin a la energa de RF y ofrecen procedimientos sencillos para controlar dicha energa. Espaol Latinoamericano 44 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 45 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Consulte los siguientes sitios web para obtener informacin adicional acerca de la exposicin a la energa de RF y de cmo controlarla para garantizar el cumplimiento de los lmites de exposicin establecidos:

http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-faqs.html www.who.int/en/

www.motorolasolutions.com/rfhealth Regulaciones de la Comisin Federal de Comunicaciones (FCC) Cuando los radios bidireccionales se usan para trabajar, la FCC indica que los usuarios deben conocer su nivel de exposicin y tener la capacidad de controlarla, a fin de cumplir los requisitos de uso profesional. El conocimiento del nivel de exposicin puede proporcionarse mediante el uso de una etiqueta de producto que muestre al usuario informacin de conocimiento especfica para los usuarios. El radio bidireccional de Motorola tiene una etiqueta de producto de exposicin a RF. Asimismo, el manual de usuario de Motorola y el folleto de seguridad que viene aparte incluyen la informacin y las directrices de funcionamiento necesarias para controlar la exposicin de RF y cumplir con los requisitos. Cumplimiento de los estndares de exposicin a RF El radio bidireccional de Motorola est diseado y probado de manera tal que cumple con varios estndares y lineamientos nacionales e internacionales

(enumerados ms adelante) en materia de exposicin humana a la energa electromagntica de radiofrecuencia. Este radio cumple con los lmites de exposicin del IEEE (FCC) y de la ICNIRP para ambientes controlados o de uso profesional con exposicin a radiofrecuencia con factores de funcionamiento de hasta un 50 % de habla y 50 % de escucha, y ha sido aprobado para uso profesional. En cuanto a la medicin de la energa de RF para el cumplimiento de estos lineamientos de exposicin, el radio genera energa de RF que puede medirse, solamente mientras realiza una transmisin (cuando el usuario habla), no al efectuar la recepcin (escucha) ni en modo de espera. 45 Espaol Latinoamericano 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 46 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM NOTA: Las bateras aprobadas que se entregan con el radio estn clasificadas para un factor de funcionamiento de 5-5-90 (5 % de habla, 5 % de escucha y 90 % en espera) a pesar de que el radio cumpla con los lmites de exposicin en uso profesional de la FCC y pueden funcionar con factores de funcionamiento de hasta un 50 % de habla. El radio bidireccional de Motorola cumple con los siguientes lineamientos y estndares de exposicin a energa de RF:

Comisin Federal de Comunicaciones (FCC, Federal Communications Commission) de los Estados Unidos, Cdigo de Regulaciones Federales;

CFR 47 y ss. FCC, Boletn de OET 65 Instituto de Ingenieros Elctricos y Electrnicos (IEEE, Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) C95.1 Comisin Internacional contra las Radiaciones No Ionizantes (ICNIRP, International Commission of Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) Cdigo de seguridad 6 del Ministerio de Salud (Canad) y RSS-102 del Ministerio de Industria de Canad Estndar de radiocomunicaciones de la entidad de comunicaciones australiana y ss. ANATEL, Anexo a Resolucin No. 303 y ss. Cumplimiento de exposicin a radiofrecuencia (RF) y lineamientos de control e instrucciones de funcionamiento para radios bidireccionales Para controlar su nivel de exposicin y garantizar el cumplimiento de los lmites de exposicin a ambientes controlados o de uso profesional, siga siempre los procedimientos siguientes. NO retire la etiqueta de exposicin a radiofrecuencia del dispositivo. Los lineamientos referentes al uso seguro por parte del usuario deberan entregarse junto con el dispositivo cuando se transfiera a otros usuarios. Espaol Latinoamericano 46 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 47 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Funcionamiento del radio bidireccional. No transmita ms all del factor de funcionamiento normal del 50 % del tiempo. Para transmitir (hablar), presione el botn PTT (pulsar para hablar). Para recibir llamadas, suelte el botn PTT. El botn PTT puede estar en el radio o puede encontrarse en los accesorios con cable o inalmbricos aprobados (por ejemplo, un botn PTT remoto con Bluetooth). La transmisin del 50 % del tiempo, o menos, es importante, porque este radio genera una exposicin a la energa de radiofrecuencia que solamente se puede medir durante la transmisin (en trminos de medicin para el cumplimiento de los estndares). Al frente de la cara. Sostenga el radio en posicin vertical frente a la cara con el micrfono (y las dems partes del radio, incluida la antena) al menos a 2,5 cm (1 pulg.) de distancia de la nariz o los labios. Mantener el radio a una distancia adecuada es importante para garantizar el cumplimiento. NOTA: La exposicin a las radiofrecuencias disminuye al aumentar la distancia con la antena. Funcionamiento del equipo ajustado al cuerpo. Siempre que use el radio ajustado al cuerpo, pngalo en un clip, un soporte, un estuche, una funda o un arns para el cuerpo aprobado por Motorola para el producto. El uso de accesorios para llevar el equipo en el cuerpo es importante, porque el uso de accesorios que no estn aprobados por Motorola puede causar que nivel de exposicin supere los lmites de exposicin a radiofrecuencia en ambientes profesionales/controlados. Use nicamente las antenas de repuesto suministradas o aprobadas por Motorola. El uso de antenas, bateras y accesorios con cable o inalmbricos no autorizados por Motorola puede exceder los lineamientos sobre la exposicin a radiofrecuencia aplicables (IEEE, ICNIRP o FCC). Para obtener una lista de las antenas, bateras y otros accesorios aprobados por Motorola para el modelo de radio, visite el siguiente sitio web:

http://www.motorolasolutions.com/governmentandenterprise 47 Espaol Latinoamericano 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 48 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Interferencia/compatibilidad electromagnticas NOTA: Casi todos los dispositivos electrnicos son susceptibles a las interferencias electromagnticas (EMI) si no cuentan con la debida proteccin o si no estn diseados o configurados de manera que sean compatibles con este tipo de seales electromagnticas. Instalaciones Para evitar conflictos de interferencias o de compatibilidad electromagntica, apague el radio en todo sitio donde haya letreros que as lo indiquen. Los hospitales y establecimientos de atencin mdica podran estar usando equipos sensibles a la energa de RF externa. Aviones Cuando est a bordo de un avin, apague el radio cuando se le indique. Si usa el radio, deber hacerlo de conformidad con las regulaciones de la lnea area y las instrucciones de la tripulacin. Dispositivos mdicos Marcapasos La asociacin de tecnologa mdica avanzada (AdvaMed) recomienda mantener una distancia mnima de 15 cm (6 pulg.) entre un radio inalmbrico porttil y un marcapasos. Estas recomendaciones estn en conformidad con las de la Administracin de Drogas y Alimentos de Estados Unidos. Las personas que usen marcapasos deben:

Mantener SIEMPRE el radio a una distancia aproximada de 15 cm (6 pulg.) o ms del marcapasos cuando est ENCENDIDO. No colocar el radio en el bolsillo de una camisa. Utilizar el odo opuesto al marcapasos para minimizar posibles interferencias. APAGAR el radio inmediatamente si cree que se est generando interferencia. Espaol Latinoamericano 48 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 49 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Aparatos auditivos Algunos radios inalmbricos digitales pueden interferir con ciertos aparatos auditivos. En caso de que existan interferencias, puede consultar con el fabricante del aparato auditivo para buscar posibles alternativas. Otros dispositivos mdicos Si utiliza cualquier otro dispositivo mdico, consulte con el fabricante del dispositivo para determinar si est protegido adecuadamente contra la energa de RF externa. Su mdico podra ayudarlo a obtener esta informacin. Uso de dispositivos de comunicacin mientras se conduce Consulte siempre las leyes y los reglamentos para el uso de radios en las zonas donde conduce. Preste toda su atencin a la conduccin y al camino. Use la funcin de manos libres, si est disponible. Salga del camino y estacinese antes de realizar o contestar una llamada, si las condiciones de manejo o los reglamentos relacionados as lo exigen. 49 Espaol Latinoamericano 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 50 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Seguridad acstica La exposicin a ruidos fuertes de cualquier fuente durante perodos prolongados podra afectar la audicin de manera temporal o permanente. Cuanto ms alto sea el volumen del radio, menos tardar la audicin en verse afectada. En ocasiones, el dao a la audicin provocado por ruidos fuertes es indetectable en un principio y puede tener efecto acumulativo. Para proteger la audicin:

Use el volumen ms bajo necesario para hacer su trabajo. Aumente el volumen solo si se encuentra en un ambiente ruidoso. Reduzca el volumen antes de conectar el audfono o auricular. Limite el tiempo durante el cual usa los auriculares o los audfonos a volumen alto. Al usar el radio sin audfono o auricular, no ponga el altavoz del radio directamente en la oreja. Advertencias sobre el funcionamiento ADVERTENCIA Para vehculos provistos de bolsa de aire (air bag):

Consulte el manual del fabricante del vehculo antes de instalar equipos electrnicos, a fin de evitar la interferencia con el cableado de las bolsas de aire. NO ponga el radio porttil sobre el rea de la bolsa de aire ni sobre la zona de despliegue de esta. Las bolsas de aire se inflan con gran fuerza. Si se pone un radio en la zona de despliegue de la bolsa de aire y esta se infla, es posible que el radio salga disparado con gran fuerza y cause lesiones graves a los ocupantes del vehculo. Espaol Latinoamericano 50 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 51 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Advertencias sobre el funcionamiento (continuacin) ADVERTENCIA Atmsferas potencialmente explosivas

(El trmino atmsferas explosivas se refiere a lugares clasificados como peligrosos que pueden contener gases, vapores o polvos peligrosos). Apague el radio antes de ingresar a un rea con una atmsfera potencialmente explosiva, a menos que el tipo de radio haya sido clasificado especficamente para el uso en tales reas como Intrnsecamente seguro (por ejemplo, aprobado por Factory Mutual, CSA, UL o CENELEC). NO retire, instale ni cargue bateras en estas reas. Las chispas en ambientes potencialmente explosivos pueden desencadenar una explosin o un incendio, y ocasionar lesiones o incluso la muerte. Entre los ambientes potencialmente explosivos mencionados anteriormente, se encuentran las reas con combustible, por ejemplo, debajo de la cubierta de barcos; instalaciones de transferencia y almacenamiento de combustible y productos qumicos; reas donde el aire contiene productos qumicos o partculas tales como granos, polvos o polvos metlicos. En las reas con atmsferas potencialmente explosivas hay generalmente seales de precaucin, aunque no siempre es as. Detonadores y reas de explosivos Para evitar posibles interferencias con operaciones de voladuras, apague el radio cuando se encuentre cerca de los detonadores, en un rea de explosivos o en reas donde se encuentre el siguiente aviso: Apague la radio bidireccional. Respete todos los carteles e instrucciones. 51 Espaol Latinoamericano 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 52 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Precauciones sobre el funcionamiento Precaucin Antenas NO use ningn radio porttil que tenga la antena daada. Si una antena daada toca la piel, puede causar una pequea quemadura. Bateras Todas las bateras pueden causar daos materiales, lesiones o quemaduras si un material conductor, por ejemplo, joyas, llaves o cadenas, hace contacto con los terminales expuestos. El material conductor podra cerrar un circuito elctrico (cortocircuito) y tornarse muy caliente. Manipule con cuidado las bateras cargadas, especialmente cuando las lleve dentro de un bolsillo, bolso o en algn otro contenedor con objetos metlicos. Informacin del radio intrnsecamente seguro La unidad con aprobacin de intrnsecamente seguro hace referencia a un producto que ha sido aprobado como intrnsecamente seguro por parte de un organismo de aprobacin (por ejemplo, FM Approvals, CSA, UL o Cenelec) y certifica que un producto determinado cumple con los estndares de intrnsecamente seguro correspondientes de dicho organismo para tipos especficos de lugares clasificados como peligrosos. Los radios porttiles que han recibido aprobacin de intrnsecamente seguros tendrn una etiqueta de aprobacin adherida para identificar la unidad como aprobada para determinadas atmsferas peligrosas. Esta etiqueta especifica la clase, la divisin o el grupo de peligro junto con el nmero de pieza de la batera que se debe usar. La etiqueta de aprobacin de intrnsecamente seguro se encontrar sobre la unidad de radio porttil. Espaol Latinoamericano 52 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 53 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Precauciones de funcionamiento para equipos intrnsecamente seguros Precaucin NO haga funcionar el equipo para comunicaciones de radio en atmsferas peligrosas, a menos que se trate de un tipo especialmente calificado (por ejemplo, aprobado por FM, UL, CSA o CENELEC). Podra producirse un incendio o una explosin. NO haga funcionar una unidad de radio que haya sido aprobada como producto intrnsecamente seguro en atmsferas peligrosas si presenta daos fsicos (por ejemplo, si la cubierta est quebrada). Podra producirse un incendio o una explosin. NO reemplace ni cargue las bateras en una atmsfera peligrosa. Mientras se instalan o se quitan las bateras, pueden producirse chispas en el contacto que provoquen una explosin o un incendio. Advertencias para los radios aprobados como intrnsecamente seguros Los radios deben enviarse desde las instalaciones de fabricacin de Motorola con la capacidad para atmsferas peligrosas y con la etiqueta que indica que est aprobado como intrnsecamente seguro (FM, UL, CSA, CENELEC). Una vez que se hayan enviado los radios a terreno, no se actualizarn para alcanzar la capacidad ni se los etiquetar. Las modificaciones cambian la configuracin del diseo original del hardware de la unidad. Solo el fabricante del producto original puede realizar modificaciones. 53 Espaol Latinoamericano 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 54 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM ADVERTENCIA NO reemplace ni cambie los accesorios en una atmsfera peligrosa. Mientras se instalan o se quitan los accesorios, pueden producirse chispas en el contacto que provoquen una explosin o un incendio. Apague el radio antes de quitar o instalar una batera o un accesorio. NO desarme un producto intrnsecamente seguro de ninguna manera que exponga los circuitos internos de la unidad. Si no se usan bateras aprobadas como intrnsecamente seguras o accesorios aprobados especficamente para la unidad de radio, puede provocar una condicin de inseguridad peligrosa en la que se usa una combinacin de radio no aprobada para lugares peligrosos. La modificacin no autorizada o incorrecta de un producto aprobado como intrnsecamente seguro anular la calificacin de aprobacin del producto. La reparacin incorrecta o el cambio de etiqueta de cualquier radio aprobado por un organismo como dispositivo intrnsecamente seguro pueden afectar de manera negativa la calificacin de aprobacin de la unidad. El uso de un radio que no sea intrnsecamente seguro en una atmsfera peligrosa puede provocar lesiones graves o la muerte. Reparacin ADVERTENCIA LAS REPARACIONES DE LOS PRODUCTOS MOTOROLA INTRNSECAMENTE SEGUROS SON RESPONSABILIDAD DEL USUARIO. Las reparaciones de un producto de radio de Motorola aprobado por FM deben realizarse en instalaciones auditadas por FM de conformidad con el estndar de reparaciones y servicio 3605 de FM. Pngase en contacto con Motorola para solicitar asistencia relacionada con las reparaciones y las tareas de servicio de los equipos Motorola intrnsecamente seguros. Espaol Latinoamericano 54 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 55 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Una reparacin consta de algo hecho en el interior de la unidad que debe devolverla a su estado original. Las instancias que no se consideran reparaciones son las que incluyen una accin realizada en una unidad que no requiere que la cubierta externa se abra de manera tal que queden expuestos los circuitos elctricos de la unidad. No sustituya los elementos opcionales ni accesorios Los equipos para comunicaciones Motorola que cuentan con un certificado de intrnsecamente seguros emitido por un organismo de aprobacin (FM, UL, CSA, CENELEC) son probados como sistemas completos que incluyen: el dispositivo porttil aprobado, la batera aprobada y los accesorios u opciones aprobados, o ambos. Debe respetar de manera estricta esta combinacin de dispositivo porttil y batera aprobados. No deben sustituirse los elementos, aun si la pieza de sustitucin ha sido aprobada con anterioridad para otro equipo de comunicaciones Motorola. Las configuraciones aprobadas son detalladas por el organismo de aprobacin (FM, UL, CSA, CENELEC). La etiqueta de aprobacin como intrnsecamente seguro adherida al radio indica la clasificacin de intrnsecamente seguro de ese radio e indica las bateras aprobadas que pueden usarse con el sistema. La etiqueta de aprobacin de intrnsecamente seguro adherida al radio hace referencia a un nmero de pieza manual que indica los accesorios o las opciones que han sido aprobados para su uso con el radio porttil. El uso de una batera o un accesorio aprobados como intrnsecamente seguros que no sean de Motorola con el radio Motorola aprobado anular la aprobacin de intrnsecamente seguro de esa unidad de radio. 55 Espaol Latinoamericano 6881095C98-J_SafetyP.book Page 56 Tuesday, May 21, 2013 2:35 PM Notas:

Espaol Latinoamericano 56